You are on page 1of 220

IBM System Storage N series 򔻐򗗠򙳰

Introduction and Planning Guide

GA32-0543-11
IBM System Storage N series 򔻐򗗠򙳰

Introduction and Planning Guide

GA32-0543-11
Note:
Before using this information and the product it supports, read the general information in “Notices” on page 175.

The following paragraph does not apply to any country (or region) where such provisions are inconsistent with local
law.
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states (or regions) do
not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply
to you.
Order publications through your IBM representative or the IBM branch office serving your locality.
© Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 2005, 2008. All rights reserved.
US Government Users Restricted Rights – Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract
with IBM Corp.
Contents
Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix

Safety and environmental notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi


Safety notices and labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Danger notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Caution notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Attention notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Laser safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Usage restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Rack safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Rack installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Safety inspection procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Rack relocation (19″ rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
Relocating the rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Product recycling and disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Battery return program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx
Fire suppression systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii

About this book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii


Who should read this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii
Supported features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii
How this document is organized . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii
Notices and statements used in this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv
Getting information, help, and service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv
Before you call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiv
Using the documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
Web sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
Hardware service and support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
Supported servers and operating systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
Firmware updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
Conventions and terminology used in this document . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvi
Command conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvi
Formatting conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvi
Keyboard conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii
How to send your comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii

Chapter 1. Planning for the IBM N series storage system . . . . . . . . 1


IBM N series storage systems and expansion units . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Expansion unit support (filers only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Intermixing EXN units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Data ONTAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Write Anywhere File Layout (WAFL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Interoperability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Adapter support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Clustering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7


N3300 hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
N3300 A10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
N3300 A20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Connecting expansion units to the N3300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2008 iii


N3300 feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
N3600 hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
N3600 A10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
N3600 A20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Connecting expansion units to the N3600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
N3600 feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
N3700 hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Understanding the differences between early and current N3700 CPU
modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Connecting expansion units to the N3700 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
N3700 feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
N5200 filer hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
N5200 A10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
N5200 A20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Connecting expansion units to the N5200 filer . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
N5200 filer feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
N5200 gateway hardware features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
N5200 G10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
N5200 G20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Connecting a gateway to external storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
N5200 gateway feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
N5300 filer hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
N5300 A10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
N5300 A20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Connecting expansion units to the N5300 filer . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
N5300 filer feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
N5300 gateway hardware features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
N5300 Model G10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
N5300 Model G20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Connecting a gateway to external storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
N5300 gateway feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
N5500 filer hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
N5500 A10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
N5500 A20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Connecting expansion units to the N5500 filer . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
N5500 filer feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
N5500 gateway hardware features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
N5500 G10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
N5500 G20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Connecting a gateway to external storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
N5500 gateway feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
N5600 filer hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
N5600 A10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
N5600 A20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Connecting expansion units to the N5600 filer . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
N5600 filer feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
N5600 gateway hardware features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
N5600 Model G10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
N5600 Model G20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Connecting a gateway to external storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
N5600 gateway feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
N7700 filer hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
N7700 A11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
N7700 A21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Connecting expansion units to the N7700 filer . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
N7700 filer feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

iv IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


N7700 gateway hardware features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
N7700 Model G11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
N7700 Model G21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Connecting a gateway to external storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
N7700 gateway feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
N7900 filer hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
N7900 A11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
N7900 A21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Connecting expansion units to the N7900 filer . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
N7900 filer feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
N7900 gateway hardware features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
N7900 Model G11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
N7900 Model G21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Connecting a gateway to external storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
N7900 gateway feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Host operating system configuration limits for iSCSI and Fibre Channel . . . 65
Configuration limits for single-controller N7000 series and N5000 series
storage systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Configuration limits for active/active N7000 series and N5000 series storage
systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Configuration limits for single-controller N3300 and N3600 systems . . . . 67
Configuration limits for active/active N3300 and N3600 systems . . . . . . 68
Configuration limits for single controller N3700 systems . . . . . . . . . 68
Configuration limits for active/active N3700 systems . . . . . . . . . . 69
EXN1000 expansion unit hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
EXN1000 feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
EXN2000 expansion unit hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
EXN2000 feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
EXN4000 expansion unit hardware features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
EXN4000 feature codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Rack mount requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Chapter 3. IBM N series storage system software features . . . . . . . 75


IBM N series host software features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Chapter 4. Site planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87


Hardware specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
N3300 and N3600 hardware specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
N3700 hardware specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
N5000 series system hardware specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
N7000 series hardware specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
EXN1000 hardware specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
EXN2000 and EXN4000 hardware specifications . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Important factors to consider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Rack considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Power supplies and power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
System input power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Electrical considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Primary computer power service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Computer room emergency power-off controls . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Lightning protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Three-phase power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Thermal considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Floor-loading specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Contents v
Floor plan considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Creating a floor plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Chapter 5. Cable planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113


General considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Cable measuring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Cable labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Connecting expansion units to filers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Expansion unit cabling requirements (filers only) . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Connecting the expansion unit directly to the N series filer storage system 116
Connecting the expansion unit to other expansion units . . . . . . . 116
Connecting a gateway to external storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Chapter 6. AutoSupport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119


How does AutoSupport work? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Interaction with mail hosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Subject line of AutoSupport e-mail messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Short e-mail messages for urgent events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Recipients of AutoSupport e-mail messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Technical Support response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Cluster considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Appendix A. Recommended power line sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . 121


Recommended AC power line sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Appendix B. Power cord list for N series storage systems . . . . . . . 123


FRU/CRU list for N series products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Power cord list for N series products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Appendix C. IBM N series worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127


N3300 and N3600 system setup worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
N3700 system setup worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
N3700 cluster system setup worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
N5000 series system setup information worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . 131
N7000 series system setup information worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Appendix D. Specifications for IBM and non-IBM racks . . . . . . . . 133


2101 Model N00 rack specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
7014 Rack specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Model T00 rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Model T42 Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
T00 and T42 service clearances and caster location . . . . . . . . . . 135
T00 and T42 racks multiple attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
T00 and T42 rack weight distribution and floor loading . . . . . . . . . 137
Rack specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
General safety requirements for IBM products installed in a non-IBM rack 141

Appendix E. Optional adapter cards supported by the N3600 . . . . . . 145


Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012) . . . . . . . 145
Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1013) . . . . . . . . 145
Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014). . . . . 145
Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015) . . . . 146
Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical) (FC 1021) . . . . . . . . . 146
Dual-port SCSI Ultra320 HBA for tape attachment (FC 1024) . . . . . . . 146
Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1026) . . . . . 147

vi IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1029) . . . . 147

Appendix F. Optional adapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500


systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter (optical) (FC 1003) . . . . . . . . . . 149
Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1004). . . . . . . . 150
Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1005) . . . . . . . 150
Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (gateway and MetroCluster
filer) (FC 1006) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1007) . . . . . . . 151
Single-port 10-Gigabit Ethernet (10-GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1008) . . . . 152
Quad-Port GbE TOE NIC (copper) (FC 1009) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1010) . . . . . . . . . 152
Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical) (FC 1011) . . . . . . . . . 152
SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel LVD Tape Adapter (FC 1016) . . . . . . . . 153
Dual-port MetroCluster VI Fibre Channel HBA (Models A20/G20 only) (FC
1018) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1019). . . . . . . . . . 153
Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1020) . . . . . . . . 154
Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for Disk (FC 1027) . . . . . . . . 154
SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1034) . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Appendix G. Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600


systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012) . . . . . . . 157
Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1013) . . . . . . . . 158
Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014). . . . . 158
Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015) . . . . 158
Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017). . . . . . . . . . 159
Dual-port GbE iSCSI adapter (optical) (FC 1021) . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Quad-port GbE Ethernet TOE adapter (copper) (FC 1022) . . . . . . . . 160
Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1023) . . . . . . . . . . 160
Dual-port Ultra320 SCSI HBA for tape attachment (FC 1024) . . . . . . . 160
Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1026) . . . . . . . . . 160
Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1029) . . . . 161
Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter (FC 1031) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (Models A20/G20 only) (FC 1032). . . . . . 161
SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1033) . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment (FC 1035) 162

Appendix H. Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems 163


PCI-X Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Single-port 10 GbE TOE adapter (FC 1008) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Quad-port Gigabit Ethernet TOE adapter (FC 1009) . . . . . . . . . . 164
Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1010) . . . . . . . . 164
Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical) (FC 1011) . . . . . . . . 164
SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel LVD tape adapter (FC 1016) . . . . . . . 164
SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1034) . . . . . . . . . . . 164
PCI-Express (PCIe) adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012) . . . . . . 165
Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1013) . . . . . . . 165
Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014). . . . 166
Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015) . . . 166
Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017). . . . . . . . . 167
Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical) (FC 1021) . . . . . . . . 167
Quad-port GbE Ethernet TOE adapter (copper) (FC 1022) . . . . . . . 167

Contents vii
Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1023) . . . . . . . . . 168
Dual-port SCSI Ultra320 HBA for tape attachment (FC 1024) . . . . . . 168
Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1026) . . . . 168
Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1029) . . . 168
Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter (FC 1031) . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (Models A20/G20 only) (FC 1032). . . . . 169
SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1033) . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment (FC
1035) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Appendix I. IBM System Storage N series documentation . . . . . . . 171


N7000 series systems library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
N5000 series systems library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
N3300 and N3600 storage systems library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
N3700 storage system library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
EXN1000, EXN2000 and EXN4000 expansion units library . . . . . . . . 171
Data ONTAP 7.2 filer library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Data ONTAP 7.1 filer library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Data ONTAP 7.2 gateway systems library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Data ONTAP 7.1 gateway systems library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Other N series and N series-related documents . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Copyrights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Trademarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Electronic emission notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Class A Statement . . . . . 177
Industry Canada Class A Emission Compliance Statement . . . . . . . 177
Avis de conformité à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada . . . . . . . 177
European Union (EU) Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive . . . . . . 177
Australia and New Zealand Class A statement . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Germany Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive . . . . . . . . . . . 178
People’s Republic of China Class A Electronic Emission Statement . . . . 179
Taiwan Class A warning statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Japan VCCI Class A ITE Electronic Emission Statement . . . . . . . . 179
Korean Class A Electronic Emission Statement . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

viii IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Figures
1. Ground check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
2. Port labeling for early N3700 CPU module designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3. Port labeling for current N3700 CPU module designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4. Example of cold aisle/hot aisle rack cabinet configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
5. Service clearances and caster locations for the T00 and T42 racks. . . . . . . . . . . . 136
6. Model T00 and T42 racks multiple attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
7. Top view of non-IBM rack specifications dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
8. Rack specifications dimensions, top front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
9. Rack specifications dimensions, bottom front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2008 ix


x IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide
Safety and environmental notices
This section contains information about:
v “Safety notices and labels”
v “Laser safety” on page xiv
v “Rack safety” on page xv
v “Product recycling and disposal” on page xix
v “Battery return program” on page xx
v “Fire suppression systems ” on page xxii

Safety notices and labels


When using this product, observe the danger, caution, and attention notices
contained in this guide. The notices are accompanied by symbols that represent the
severity of the safety condition.

The following sections define each type of safety notice and provide examples.

The following notices and statements are used in IBM® documents. They are listed
below in order of increasing severity of potential hazards. Follow the links for more
detailed descriptions and examples of the danger, caution, and attention notices in
the sections that follow.
v Note: These notices provide important tips, guidance, or advice.
v “Attention notices” on page xiii: These notices indicate potential damage to
programs, devices, or data.
v “Caution notices” on page xiii: These statements indicate situations that can
be potentially hazardous to you.
v “Danger notices”: These statements indicate situations that can be potentially
lethal or extremely hazardous to you. Safety labels are also attached directly to
products to warn of these situations.
v In addition to these notices, “Labels” on page xii may be attached to the product
to warn of potential hazards.

Danger notices
A danger notice calls attention to a situation that is potentially lethal or extremely
hazardous to people. A lightning bolt symbol accompanies a danger notice to
represent a dangerous electrical condition. A sample danger notice follows.

DANGER
An electrical outlet that is not correctly wired could place
hazardous voltage on metal parts of the system or the devices
that attach to the system. It is the responsibility of the customer
to ensure that the outlet is correctly wired and grounded to
prevent an electrical shock.

A comprehensive danger notice provides instructions on how to avoid shock


hazards when servicing equipment. Unless instructed otherwise, follow the
procedures in the following danger notice.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2008 xi


DANGER
Electrical voltage and current from power, telephone, and
communication cables are hazardous.

To avoid a shock hazard:


v Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform
installation, maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product
during an electrical storm.
v Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded
electrical outlet. Ensure outlet supplies proper voltage and
phase rotation according to the system rating plate.
v Connect any equipment that will be attached to this product to
properly wired outlets.
v When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect
signal cables.
v Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire,
water, or structural damage.
v Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications
systems, networks, and modems before you open the device
covers, unless instructed otherwise in the installation and
configuration procedures.
v Connect and disconnect cables as described below when
installing, moving, or opening covers on this product or
attached devices.

To Disconnect:
1. Turn everything OFF (unless instructed otherwise).
2. Remove power cords from the outlet.
3. Remove signal cables from connectors.
4. Remove all cables from devices.

To Connect:
1. Turn everything OFF (unless instructed otherwise).
2. Attach all cables to devices.
3. Attach signal cables to connectors.
4. Attach power cords to outlet.
5. Turn device ON.

Labels
As an added precaution, safety labels are often installed directly on products or
product components to warn of potential hazards.

The actual product safety labels may differ from these sample safety labels:

DANGER
Hazardous voltage, current, or energy levels are present
inside any component that has this label attached.

Do not service, there are no serviceable parts.

xii IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


DANGER
Multiple power cords

To remove all power to the device, disconnect all power cords.

Caution notices
A caution notice calls attention to a situation that is potentially hazardous to people
because of some existing condition. A caution notice can be accompanied by
different symbols, as in the examples below:

If the symbol is... It means...


A hazardous electrical condition with less severity than
electrical danger.

A generally hazardous condition not represented by other


safety symbols.

A hazardous condition due to the use of a laser in the


product. Laser symbols are always accompanied by the
classification of the laser as defined by the U. S.
Department of Health and Human Services (for example,
Class I, Class II, and so forth).

Sample caution notices:

CAUTION:
This product is equipped with a 3–wire (two conductors and
ground) power cable and plug. Use this power cable with a properly
grounded electrical outlet to avoid electrical shock.

CAUTION:
Data processing environments can contain equipment transmitting
on system links with laser modules that operate at greater than
Class 1 power levels. For this reason, never look into the end of an
optical fiber cable or open receptacle.

Attention notices
An attention notice indicates the possibility of damage to a program, device, or
system, or to data. An exclamation point symbol may accompany an attention
notice, but is not required. A sample attention notice follows:

Attention: Do not bend a fibre cable to a radius less than 5 cm (2 in.);


you can damage the cable. Tie wraps are not recommended for optical
cables because they can be easily overtightened, causing damage to the
cable.

Safety and environmental notices xiii


Laser safety
When using an NVRAM5 or NVRAM6 cluster media converter, the storage system
must be installed in a restricted access location.

CAUTION:
This product contains a Class 1M laser. Do not view directly with optical
instruments. (C028)

This equipment contains Class 1 laser products, and complies with FDA radiation
Performance Standards, 21 CFR Subchapter J and the international laser safety
standard IEC 825-2.

CAUTION:
Data processing environments can contain equipment transmitting on
system links with laser modules that operate at greater than Class 1
power levels. For this reason, never look into the end of an optical fiber
cable or open receptacle.

Attention: In the United States, use only SFP or GBIC optical transceivers that
comply with the FDA radiation performance standards, 21 CFR Subchapter J.
Internationally, use only SFP or GBIC optical transceivers that comply with IEC
standard 825–1. Optical products that do not comply with these standards may
product light that is hazardous to the eyes.

Usage restrictions
The optical ports of the modules must be terminated with an optical connector or
with a dust plug.

xiv IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Rack safety

Rack installation
DANGER

v Always lower the leveling pads on the rack cabinet.


v Always install stabilizer brackets on the rack cabinet.
v To avoid hazardous conditions due to uneven mechanical
loading, always install the heaviest devices in the bottom of
the rack cabinet. Always install servers and optional devices
starting from the bottom of the rack cabinets.
v Rack-mounted devices are not to be used as a shelf or work
space. Do not place any object on top of rack-mounted
devices.
v Each rack cabinet might have more than one power cord. Be
sure to disconnect all power cords in the rack cabinet before
servicing any device in the rack cabinet.
v Connect all devices installed in a rack cabinet to power
devices installed in the same rack cabinet. Do not plug a
power cord from a device installed in one rack cabinet into a
power device installed in a different rack cabinet.

CAUTION:
v Do not install a unit in a rack where the internal rack ambient
temperatures will exceed the manufacturer’s recommended
ambient temperature for all your rack-mounted devices.
v Do not install a unit in a rack where the air flow is compromised.
Ensure that air flow is not blocked or reduced on any side, front,
or back of a unit used for air flow through the unit.
v Consideration should be given to the connection of the
equipment to the supply circuit so that overloading of the
circuits does not compromise the supply wiring or overcurrent
protection.
v To provide the correct power connection to a rack, refer to the
rating labels located on the equipment in the rack to determine
the total power requirement of the supply circuit.
v This drawer is a fixed drawer and should not be moved for
servicing unless specified by manufacturer. Attempting to move
the drawer partially or completely out of the rack may cause the
rack to become unstable or cause the drawer to fall out of the
rack.

Safety inspection procedure


Perform a safety inspection on the rack when any of the following conditions occur:
v The rack is inspected under a maintenance agreement.
v Service is requested and service has not recently been performed.
v An alterations-and-attachments review is performed.
v Changes have been made to the equipment that might affect the safe operation
of the equipment.

Safety and environmental notices xv


v External devices with an attached power cord are connected to the rack.

Be cautious of potential safety hazards that are not covered in the safety checks. If
the inspection indicates an unacceptable safety condition, the condition must be
corrected before you can service the machine.

Note: It is the responsibility of the owner of the system to correct any unsafe
condition.

Do the following safety checks:


1. If the rack is bolted down, ensure that the rack is firmly secured to the floor.
2. If the rack is not bolted down, ensure that the stabilizers are firmly attached to
both the bottom front and bottom rear of the rack.
CAUTION:
The stabilizer must be firmly attached to the bottom front and bottom
rear of the rack to prevent the rack from turning over when the filers or
expansion units are pulled out of the rack. Do not pull out or install any
filer or expansion unit or feature if the stabilizer is not attached to the
rack.
3. Check the covers for sharp edges and for damage or alterations that expose
the internal parts of the rack.
4. Check the covers for a proper fit to the rack. The covers should be in place
and secure.
5. Open the back door of the rack.
6. Perform the power-off procedure for the power distribution unit (PDU) that is
installed in the rack.
7. Check for alterations or attachments. If there are any, check for obvious safety
hazards such as broken wires, sharp edges, or broken insulation.
8. Check the internal cables for damage.
9. Check for dirt, water, and any other contamination within the rack.
10. Check the voltage label on the back of the system unit to ensure that it
matches the voltage at the outlet.
11. Check the external power cable for damage.
12. Perform the following grounding checks:
a. With the external power cord connected to the system unit, check for 0.1
ohm or less resistance between the ground plug on the external power
cord plug and the metal frame. See Figure 1 on page xvii.

xvi IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Rear View

L1
L1

L1

RT000015

Figure 1. Ground check

b. Using the appropriate probe, check for 0.1 ohm or less resistance between
the metal frame and the grounding pin on each of the power outlets on
each power distribution bus.
13. Check for the following conditions for each external device that has an
attached power cord:
v Damage to the power cord.
v The correct grounded power cord.
v With the external power cord connected to the device, check for 0.1 ohm or
less resistance between the ground lug on the external power cord plug and
the metal frame of the device.
14. Close the rear cover of the rack.
15. Perform the power-on procedure for the PDU that is installed in the rack.

Safety and environmental notices xvii


Rack relocation (19″ rack)
CAUTION:
Removing components from the upper positions in the rack cabinet improves
rack stability during relocation. Follow these general guidelines whenever you
relocate a populated rack cabinet within a room or building:
v Reduce the weight of the rack cabinet by removing equipment starting at
the top of the rack cabinet. When possible, restore the rack cabinet to the
configuration of the rack cabinet as you received it. If this configuration is
not known, you must do the following:
– Remove all devices in the 32U position and above.
– Ensure that the heaviest devices are installed in the bottom of the rack
cabinet.
– Ensure that there are no empty U-levels between devices installed in the
rack cabinet below the 32U level.
– If the rack cabinet you are relocating is part of a suite of rack cabinets,
detach the rack cabinet from the suite.
– Inspect the route that you plan to take when moving the rack to
eliminate potential hazards.
– Verify that the route that you choose can support the weight of the
loaded rack cabinet. Refer to the documentation that came with your
rack cabinet for the weight of a loaded rack cabinet.
– Verify that all door openings are at least 760 x 2030 mm (30 x 80 in.).
– Ensure that all devices, shelves, drawers, doors, and cables are secure.
– Ensure that the four leveling pads are raised to their highest position.
– Ensure that there is no stabilizer bracket installed on the rack cabinet
during movement.
– Do not use a ramp inclined at more than ten degrees.
– Once the rack cabinet is in the new location, do the following:
- Lower the four leveling pads.
- Install stabilizer brackets on the rack cabinet.
- If you removed any devices from the rack cabinet, repopulate the rack
cabinet from the lowest position to the highest position.
– If a long distance relocation is required, restore the rack cabinet to the
configuration of the rack cabinet as you received it. Pack the rack
cabinet in the original packaging material, or equivalent. Also, lower the
leveling pads to raise the casters off of the pallet and bolt the rack
cabinet to the pallet.

For additional information, refer to the documentation for your rack cabinet.

xviii IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Relocating the rack
The following safety notices apply to the procedures in this section.

CAUTION:
Make sure that you do the following:
v Before you add or remove drawers, always have the leveling feet lowered
and the front and rear stabilizer installed, or have the rack bolted to the
floor.
v Always install drawers at the bottom of the rack first.
v Always remove drawers from the top of the rack first.
v Always install the heaviest drawers on the bottom of the rack.
v Remove two or three drawers from the top of the rack before you relocate
it.
v Never push on the sides of the rack.

Attention: If the rack has equipment located above EIA location 32, you must
remove the equipment in position 32 and above from the rack before you move it.
Always remove the equipment from the top of the rack first.

Complete the following steps before you relocate a rack:


1. Turn off all power to the rack and the system that is installed.
2. Disconnect all power cables.
3. Make sure that the rack is either bolted down or has the stabilizers installed
before continuing this procedure.
4. Before removing any drawers from the rack, ensure that the battery LEDs on
the controller units are NOT blinking. A blinking LED indicates that the batteries
are in use. To ensure that the batteries do not discharge during the relocation
process, remove and reseat the battery packs before removing the drawer.

Complete the following steps to relocate the rack:


1. Unbolt the rack from the floor or remove the stabilizers.
2. Raise all the leveling feet.
3. Unlock each caster wheel by loosening the screw on the caster.
4. Move the rack to the new position.
5. Reposition the rack.

For additional information, refer to the documentation for your rack cabinet.

Product recycling and disposal


This unit must be recycled or discarded according to applicable local and national
regulations. IBM encourages owners of information technology (IT) equipment to
responsibly recycle their equipment when it is no longer needed. IBM offers a
variety of product return programs and services in several countries to assist
equipment owners in recycling their IT products. Information on IBM product
recycling offerings can be found on IBM’s Internet site at: www.ibm.com/ibm/
environment/products/index.shtml

Esta unidad debe reciclarse o desecharse de acuerdo con lo establecido en la


normativa nacional o local aplicable. IBM recomienda a los propietarios de equipos
de tecnología de la informacion (TI) que reciclen responsablemente sus equipos
cuando éstos ya no les sean utiles. IBM dispone de una serie de programas y

Safety and environmental notices xix


servicios de devolucion de productos en varios países, a fin de ayudar a los
propietarios de equipos a reciclar sus productos de TI. Se puede encontrar
informacion sobre las ofertas de reciclado de productos de IBM en el sitio web de
IBM www.ibm.com/ibm/environment/products/index.shtml.

Notice: This mark applies only to countries within the European Union (EU) and
Norway.

Appliances are labelled in accordance with European Directive 2002/96/EC


concerning waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE). The Directive
determines the framework for the return and recycling of used appliances as
applicable throughout the European Union. This label is applied to various products
to indicate that the product is not to be thrown away, but rather reclaimed upon end
of life per this Directive.

Remarque: Cette marque s'applique uniquement aux pays de l'Union Européenne


et à la Norvège.

L'etiquette du système respecte la Directive européenne 2002/96/EC en matière de


Déchets des Equipements Electriques et Electroniques (DEEE), qui détermine les
dispositions de retour et de recyclage applicables aux systèmes utilisés à travers
l'Union européenne. Conformément à la directive, ladite étiquette précise que le
produit sur lequel elle est apposée ne doit pas être jeté mais être récupéré en fin
de vie.

In accordance with the European WEEE Directive, electrical and electronic


equipment (EEE) is to be collected separately and to be reused, recycled, or
recovered at end of life. Users of EEE with the WEEE marking per Annex IV of the
WEEE Directive, as shown above, must not dispose of end of life EEE as unsorted
municipal waste, but use the collection framework available to customers for the
return, recycling and recovery of WEEE. Customer participation is important to
minimize any potential effects of EEE on the environment and human health due to
the potential presence of hazardous substances in EEE. For proper collection and
treatment, contact your local IBM representative.

Battery return program


This product may contain sealed lead acid, nickel cadmium, nickel metal hydride,
lithium, or lithium ion battery. Consult your user manual or service manual for
specific battery information. The battery must be recycled or disposed of properly.
Recycling facilities may not be available in your area. For information on disposal of

xx IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


batteries outside the United States, go to www.ibm.com/ibm/environment/products/
batteryrecycle.shtml or contact your local waste disposal facility.

In the United States, IBM has established a return process for reuse, recycling, or
proper disposal of used IBM sealed lead acid, nickel cadmium, nickel metal hydride,
and other battery packs from IBM Equipment. For information on proper disposal of
these batteries, contact IBM at 1-800-426-4333. Please have the IBM part number
listed on the battery available prior to your call.

For Taiwan:

Please recycle batteries.

For the European Union:

Notice: This mark applies only to countries within the European Union (EU).

Batteries or packaging for batteries are labeled in accordance with European


Directive 2006/66/EC concerning batteries and accumulators and waste batteries
and accumulators. The Directive determines the framework for the return and
recycling of used batteries and accumulators as applicable throughout the European
Union. This label is applied to various batteries to indicate that the battery is not to
be thrown away, but rather reclaimed upon end of life per this Directive.

Les batteries ou emballages pour batteries sont étiquetés conformément aux


directives européennes 2006/66/EC, norme relative aux batteries et accumulateurs
en usage et aux batteries et accumulateurs usés. Les directives déterminent la
marche à suivre en vigueur dans l’Union Européenne pour le retour et le recyclage
des batteries et accumulateurs usés. Cette étiquette est appliquée sur diverses
batteries pour indiquer que la batterie ne doit pas être mise au rebut mais plutôt
récupérée en fin de cycle de vie selon cette norme.

Safety and environmental notices xxi


In accordance with the European Directive 2006/66/EC, batteries and accumulators
are labeled to indicate that they are to be collected separately and recycled at end
of life. The label on the battery may also include a chemical symbol for the metal
concerned in the battery (Pb for lead, Hg for mercury and Cd for cadmium). Users
of batteries and accumulators must not dispose of batteries and accumulators as
unsorted municipal waste, but use the collection framework available to customers
for the return, recycling and treatment of batteries and accumulators. Customer
participation is important to minimize any potential effects of batteries and
accumulators on the environment and human health due to the potential presence
of hazardous substances. For proper collection and treatment, contact your local
IBM representative.

For California:

Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/


hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

The foregoing notice is provided in accordance with California Code of Regulations


Title 22, Division 4.5 Chapter 33. Best Management Practices for Perchlorate
Materials. This product, part or both may include a lithium manganese dioxide
battery which contains a perchlorate substance.

Fire suppression systems


A fire suppression system is the responsibility of the customer. The customer’s own
insurance underwriter, local fire marshal, or a local building inspector, or both,
should be consulted in selecting a fire suppression system that provides the correct
level of coverage and protection. IBM designs and manufactures equipment to
internal and external standards that require certain environments for reliable
operation. Because IBM does not test any equipment for compatibility with fire
suppression systems, IBM does not make compatibility claims of any kind nor does
IBM provide recommendations on fire suppression systems.

xxii IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


About this book
This document provides introductory and planning information for IBM System
Storage™ N series products, including N3300, N3600, and N3700 filers, N5000
series filers and gateways, N7000 series filers and gateways, and EXN1000,
EXN2000, and EXN4000 storage expansion units.

Who should read this document


This guide is for qualified system administrators and service personnel who are
familiar with IBM storage systems. This document is for customer use. This
document is intended to provide information to customers, operators, administrators,
installers, and service personnel.

Supported features
IBM System Storage N series storage systems and expansion boxes are driven by
NetApp® Data ONTAP® software. Some features described in the product software
documentation are neither offered nor supported by IBM. Please contact your local
IBM representative or reseller for further details.

Information about supported features can also be found at the following Web site:

www.ibm.com/storage/support/nas/

A listing of currently available N series products and features can be found at the
following Web site:

www.ibm.com/storage/nas/

How this document is organized


This document contains the following chapters:
v Chapter 1, “Planning for the IBM N series storage system,” on page 1
v Chapter 2, “IBM N series hardware features,” on page 7
v Chapter 3, “IBM N series storage system software features,” on page 75
v Chapter 4, “Site planning,” on page 87
v Chapter 5, “Cable planning,” on page 113
v Chapter 6, “AutoSupport,” on page 119
v Appendix A, “Recommended power line sizes,” on page 121
v Appendix B, “Power cord list for N series storage systems,” on page 123
v Appendix C, “IBM N series worksheets,” on page 127
v Appendix D, “Specifications for IBM and non-IBM racks,” on page 133
v Appendix E, “Optional adapter cards supported by the N3600,” on page 145
v Appendix F, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500 systems,”
on page 149
v Appendix G, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600 systems,”
on page 157
v Appendix H, “Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems,” on
page 163
v Appendix I, “IBM System Storage N series documentation,” on page 171
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2008 xxiii
Notices and statements used in this document
The caution and danger statements used in this document also appear in the
multilingual IBM Safety Information document. Each caution and danger statement
is numbered for easy reference to the corresponding statements in the safety
document.

The following types of notices and statements are used in this document:
v Note: These notices provide important tips, guidance, or advice.
v Important: These notices provide information or advice that might help you avoid
inconvenient or problem situations.
v Attention: These notices indicate possible damage to programs, devices, or
data. An attention notice is placed just before the instruction or situation in which
damage could occur.
v Caution: These statements indicate situations that can be potentially hazardous
to you. A caution statement is placed just before the description of a potentially
hazardous procedure step or situation.
v Danger: These statements indicate situations that can be potentially lethal or
extremely hazardous to you. A danger statement is placed just before the
description of a potentially lethal or extremely hazardous procedure step or
situation.

Getting information, help, and service


If you need help, service, or technical assistance or just want more information
about IBM products, you will find a wide variety of sources available from IBM to
assist you. This section contains information about where to go for additional
information about IBM and IBM products, what to do if you experience a problem
with your IBM System Storage N series product, and whom to call for service, if it is
necessary.

The following applies in Taiwan:

IBM Taiwan Product Service Contact Info:


IBM Taiwan Corporation
3F, No 7, Song Ren Rd., Taipei Taiwan
Tel: 0800-016-888

Before you call


Before you call, make sure that you have taken these steps to try to solve the
problem yourself:
v Check all cables to make sure that they are connected.
v Check the power switches to make sure that the system is turned on.
v Use the troubleshooting information in your system documentation and use the
diagnostic tools that come with your system.
v Check the IBM support Web site for known problems and limitations.

xxiv IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Using the documentation
Information about the N series product and Data ONTAP software is available in
printed documents and a documentation CD that comes with your system. The
same documentation is available as PDF files on the IBM NAS support Web site:

www.ibm.com/storage/support/nas/

Web sites
IBM maintains pages on the World Wide Web where you can get the latest
technical information and download device drivers and updates.
v For NAS product information, go to the following Web site:
www.ibm.com/storage/nas/
v For NAS support information, go to the following Web site:
www.ibm.com/storage/support/nas/
v For AutoSupport information, go to the following Web site:
www.ibm.com/storage/support/nas/
v For the latest version of N series publications, go to the following Web site:
www.ibm.com/storage/support/nas/

Hardware service and support


You can receive hardware service through IBM Integrated Technology Services.
Visit the following Web site for support telephone numbers:

www.ibm.com/planetwide/

Supported servers and operating systems


IBM N series products attach to many servers and many operating systems. To
determine the latest supported attachments, visit the following Web site and access
the IBM System Storage N series interoperability matrix:

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

Firmware updates
As with all devices, it is recommended that you run the latest level of firmware,
which is embedded in Data ONTAP. If there are changes, they will be posted to the
following Web site:

www.ibm.com/storage/support/nas/

Note: If you do not see new changes on the Web site, you are running the latest
level of firmware.

Verify that the latest level of firmware is installed on your machine before contacting
IBM for technical support.

Conventions and terminology used in this document


This guide uses the following terminology, command conventions, format
conventions and keyboard conventions:

About this book xxv


Terminology
In this and other IBM N series documents, the term filer describes IBM N series
models that contain internal disk storage, attach to the disk storage expansion units
specifically designed for the IBM N series storage systems, or both. There are three
disk storage expansion units specifically designed for the IBM N series filers:
v IBM EXN4000 Fibre Channel disk storage expansion unit
v IBM EXN2000 Fibre Channel disk storage expansion unit
v IBM EXN1000 serial advanced technology attachment (SATA) storage expansion
unit

Note: EXN expansion units are not intended for attachment to a gateway.

The term gateway describes IBM N series models that do not contain internal disk
storage or attach to disk storage expansion units. IBM N series gateways attach to
external storage devices on a Storage Area Network (SAN).

The terms system or storage system refer to either a gateway by itself or a filer,
either by itself or with additional disk drives.

In addition, this guide uses the following terms:


v AT-FCX refers to the controller module of the serial advanced technology
attachment (SATA) storage expansion unit.
v Active/active configuration (sometimes referred to as clustered configuration)
refers to a High Availability system with at least two nodes that share resources
to provide redundancy.
v Device carrier refers to the container that encases a fan/power supply unit or a
disk.
v Disk applies to any hard disk drive.
v Expansion unit refers to any expansion unit containing hard disk drives.
v ESH2 refers to the controller module of the EXN2000 Fibre Channel disk storage
expansion unit.
v ESH4 refers to the controller module of the EXN4000 Fibre Channel disk storage
expansion unit.
v Loop refers to one or more daisy-chained expansion units connected to a filer.
v Motherboard tray or CPU module refers to the system controller module that
executes the software on an N series storage system. The motherboard tray is at
the rear of the N series storage system.
v Node refers to a chassis. There is one node in the A10 and G10 models; there
are two nodes in the A20 and G20 models. Node also refers to a CPU module
when used in a clustered configuration.

Command conventions
You can enter commands on the system console or from any client that can obtain
access to the appliance using a Telnet session. In examples that illustrate
commands executed on a UNIX® workstation, the command syntax and output
might differ, depending on your version of UNIX.

Formatting conventions
The following table lists different character formats used in this guide to set off
special information.

xxvi IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Formatting convention Type of information
Italic type v Words or characters that require special
attention.
v Placeholders for information you must
supply. For example, if the guide requires
you to enter the fctest adaptername
command, you enter the characters
“fctest” followed by the actual name of the
adapter.
v Book titles in cross-references.
Monospaced font v Command and daemon names.
v Information displayed on the system
console or other computer monitors.
v The contents of files.
Bold monospaced font Words or characters you type. What you type
is always shown in lowercase letters, unless
your program is case-sensitive and
uppercase letters are necessary for it to work
properly.

Keyboard conventions
This guide uses capitalization and some abbreviations to refer to the keys on the
keyboard. The keys on your keyboard might not be labeled exactly as they are in
this guide.

What is in this guide... What it means...


hyphen (-) Used to separate individual keys. For
example, Ctrl-D means holding down the Ctrl
key while pressing the D key.
Enter Used to refer to the key that generates a
carriage return, although the key is named
Return on some keyboards.
type Used to mean pressing one or more keys on
the keyboard.
enter Used to mean pressing one or more keys
and then pressing the Enter key.

How to send your comments


Your feedback is important in helping us provide the most accurate and high-quality
information. If you have comments or suggestions for improving this document,
send us your comments by e-mail to starpubs@us.ibm.com or use the Readers’
Comments form at the back of this publication. Be sure to include the following:
v Exact publication title
v Form number (for example, GC26-1234-02)
v Page numbers to which you are referring

If the Reader Comment Form in the back of this manual is missing, you can direct
your mail to:

About this book xxvii


International Business Machines Corporation
Information Development
Department GZW
9000 South Rita Road
Tucson, Arizona 85744-0001 U.S.A.

When you send information to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or
distribute the information in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any
obligation to you.

xxviii IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Chapter 1. Planning for the IBM N series storage system
Successful installation of the IBM System Storage N series storage system requires
careful planning. You are the most valuable resource in site planning because you
have the most detailed understanding of how the N series storage system and
devices attached to it will be used.

Site preparation is the responsibility of the customer and this document will provide
basic information required to do this preparation. You may want to also enlist the
help of your Field Technical Support Specialist, marketing representative, or other
support personnel.

Your marketing representative is available to ensure that the hardware and software
that you have chosen will meet your needs.

Planning for the IBM N series storage system consists of these main tasks:
1. Understanding the features and functions of the N series storage system and
selecting the proper feature codes (FCs) for your business as described in
Chapter 2, “IBM N series hardware features,” on page 7 and Chapter 3, “IBM N
series storage system software features,” on page 75.
2. Planning for the physical environment where the equipment will operate. This
planning step includes the physical space, electrical, temperature, humidity,
altitude, air flow, service clearance, and similar requirements as described in
Chapter 4, “Site planning,” on page 87.
3. Planning for cabling depends on the adapter feature codes (FCs) selected as
described in Chapter 5, “Cable planning,” on page 113.
4. If required, planning for a dual-node clustered configuration for high availability
as described in “Clustering” on page 4.
5. Planning for reporting error information to IBM as described in Chapter 6,
“AutoSupport,” on page 119.

This chapter also introduces the following topics:


v “IBM N series storage systems and expansion units”
v “Expansion unit support (filers only)” on page 2
v “Data ONTAP” on page 3
v “Write Anywhere File Layout (WAFL)” on page 3
v “Interoperability” on page 3
v “Adapter support” on page 3
v “Clustering” on page 4

IBM N series storage systems and expansion units


The following IBM System Storage N series storage systems and expansion units
are described in Chapter 2, “IBM N series hardware features,” on page 7.
v “N3300 hardware features” on page 7
v “N3600 hardware features” on page 10
v “N3700 hardware features” on page 13
v “N5200 filer hardware features” on page 17
v “N5200 gateway hardware features” on page 22
v “N5300 filer hardware features” on page 25

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2008 1


v “N5300 gateway hardware features” on page 29
v “N5500 filer hardware features” on page 32
v “N5500 gateway hardware features” on page 36
v “N5600 filer hardware features” on page 39
v “N5600 gateway hardware features” on page 44
v “N7700 filer hardware features” on page 47
v “N7700 gateway hardware features” on page 52
v “N7900 filer hardware features” on page 55
v “N7900 gateway hardware features” on page 60
v “EXN1000 expansion unit hardware features” on page 70
v “EXN2000 expansion unit hardware features” on page 71
v “EXN4000 expansion unit hardware features” on page 72

Expansion unit support (filers only)


There are currently three disk storage expansion units specifically designed for the
IBM N series filers:
v IBM EXN4000 Fibre Channel disk storage expansion unit
v IBM EXN2000 Fibre Channel disk storage expansion unit
v IBM EXN1000 serial advanced technology attachment (SATA) storage expansion
unit

Note: EXN expansion units are not intended for attachment to a gateway.

Multiple EXN1000s, each having different SATA disk drive feature codes, may be
attached to the same N series filer on the same Fibre Channel loop.

Multiple EXN2000s and EXN4000s, each having different Fibre Channel disk drive
feature codes, may be attached to the same N series filer on the same Fibre
Channel loop.

For the latest storage expansion unit support information, visit the following Web
site:

www.ibm.com/storage/support/nas/

Intermixing EXN units


EXN4000s and EXN2000s are both Fibre Channel disk storage expansion units.
EXN4000 and EXN2000 expansion units can be mixed within the same loop, but
the speed switches on all EXN4000s and EXN2000s must be set to the same
speed (either 1 Gbps or 2 Gbps).

Intermixing Fibre Channel and SATA disk drives in a supported N series filer
configuration is supported as follows:
v Intermixing Fibre Channel disk expansion units with SATA disk expansion units
on the same loop is not supported.
v EXN4000s or EXN2000s (Fibre Channel disk drives) and EXN1000s (SATA disk
drives) may be attached to the same N series filer only if the Fibre Channel disk
expansion units (EXN4000s or EXN2000s) are on separate loops than the SATA
disk expansion units (EXN1000s).

2 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Attention: Intermixing Fibre Channel and SATA disk drives in an N3700
configuration is not supported. Only N3300, N3600, N5000 and N7000 series
models support intermixing of Fibre Channel and SATA disk drives in a
configuration.

Data ONTAP
N series storage systems are driven by the Data ONTAP operating system. Data
ONTAP is a highly optimized, scalable, and flexible operating system that can
handle mixed SAN and NAS environments. Data ONTAP delivers flexible
management and high availability, ensures business continuance, and provides data
permanence, thereby reducing storage management complexity in your enterprise.
Data ONTAP software integrates seamlessly into UNIX, Windows®, and Web
environments and provides the foundation to build your storage infrastructure and
an enterprise-wide data fabric for mission-critical business applications. The
operating system includes integrated secure access capabilities (SSL, SSH) and
FilerView, a Web-based element manager.

The innovative Data ONTAP architecture delivers scalable performance and a


flexible storage environment, that can be applied in many environments ranging
from small workgroups to enterprise data centers. Data ONTAP stores and serves
applications, consolidates data, and provides reliable data access throughout the
enterprise. The Data ONTAP operating system simplifies management and
optimizes storage utilization by combining file-system technology and a microkernel
design, enabling such features as flexible data management, scalability, and
heterogeneous access.

Write Anywhere File Layout (WAFL)


The WAFL (Write Anywhere File Layout) file system contributes to a high level of
data availability while providing dynamic and flexible data storage containers using
Flexible Volume technology as well as data protection using integrated, nonvolatile
RAM and a block-level checksum capability. The WAFL file system is designed
specifically to work in an NFS appliance. The primary focus is on the algorithms
and data structures that WAFL uses to implement Snapshots, which are read-only
clones of the active file system. WAFL uses a copy-on-write technique to minimize
the disk space that Snapshots consume.

Interoperability
The latest information on software and hardware interoperability can be accessed
at:

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

Adapter support
There are no PCI adapter slots on the N3300 and N3700 systems. No additional
adapter options are supported for the N3300 and N3700 systems.

There is one available PCIe adapter slot per node on the N3600 storage system.
For an A20 model, adapters must be added in pairs, one per node, so that both
nodes are populated with one of the same type of PCIe adapter.

Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N3600 are described in Appendix E,
“Optional adapter cards supported by the N3600,” on page 145.

Chapter 1. Planning for the IBM N series storage system 3


There are three available PCI-X adapter slots per node on the N5200 and N5500
storage systems. (A10/G10 models have three available PCI-X adapter slots.
A20/G20 models have six available PCI-X adapter slots.) Adapters must be added
in pairs, one per node, to an A20/G20 model, so that both nodes are populated with
the same number of each type of PCI-X adapters.

Note: The PCI-X adapters supported by the N5200 and N5500 storage systems
are described in Appendix F, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5200
and N5500 systems,” on page 149.

There are three available PCIe adapter slots per node on the N5300 and N5600
storage systems. (A10/G10 models have three available PCIe adapter slots.
A20/G20 models have six available PCIe adapter slots.) Adapters must be added in
pairs, one per node, to an A20/G20 model, so that both nodes are populated with
the same number of each type of PCIe adapters.

Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N5300 and N5600 storage systems are
described in Appendix G, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and
N5600 systems,” on page 157.

There are five available PCIe adapter slots and three available PCI-X adapter slots
per node on the N7700 and N7900 storage systems. (The sixth PCIe adapter slot
on each N7700 or N7900 node is reserved for the NVRAM6 adapter and is not
available for PCIe adapter card use). Adapters must be added in pairs, one per
node, to an A21/G21 model, so that both nodes are populated with the same
number of each type of PCI-X/PCIe adapters.

Note: The PCIe and PCI-X adapters supported by the N7700 and N7900 storage
systems are described in Appendix H, “Optional adapter cards supported by
N7000 series systems,” on page 163.

Clustering
Before beginning hardware planning, the key hardware decision is to decide if the
higher availability obtained by clustering two N series storage system nodes in a
single Model A20 is needed. Clustered configurations are referred to as
active/active configurations.

Two N series storage system nodes can be clustered together for higher availability
using the Cluster Failover (CFO) software feature. Each node continually monitors
its partner, mirroring the data for each other’s NVRAM.

The IBM N3300, N3600, and N3700 systems all contain both clustered nodes in the
same enclosure.

In all IBM N5000 and N7000 series models, a standard cluster contains two nodes,
with each node contained in a different enclosure. Both nodes must be the same N
series model. The two nodes are clustered through an Infiniband (IB) cluster cable
that is attached to the NVRAM5 adapter (for N5200 and N5500 models) or
NVRAM6 adapter (for N5300, N5600 and N7000 series models), which allows one
node to serve data to the disks of its failed partner node.

Configuring storage systems in a cluster provides the following benefits:


v Fault tolerance

4 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


When one node fails or becomes impaired, a takeover occurs, and the partner
node continues to serve the failed node’s data.
v Nondisruptive software upgrades
When you halt one node and allow takeover, the partner node continues to serve
data for the halted node while you upgrade the node you halted. For more
information about nondisruptive upgrades, see the IBM System Storage N series
Data ONTAP Upgrade Guide for your version of Data ONTAP.
v Nondisruptive storage system and disk maintenance
When you halt one node and allow takeover, the partner node continues to serve
data for the halted node while you replace or repair hardware in the node you
halted.

More information about clustering is provided in the following documents:


v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Active/Active Configuration Guide
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Cluster Installation and
Administration Guide
v IBM System Storage N series MetroCluster Redbook, REDP-4243-00

Chapter 1. Planning for the IBM N series storage system 5


6 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide
Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features
This chapter describes the hardware features for the following N series products.
v “N3300 hardware features”
v “N3600 hardware features” on page 10
v “N3700 hardware features” on page 13
v “N5200 filer hardware features” on page 17
v “N5200 gateway hardware features” on page 22
v “N5300 filer hardware features” on page 25
v “N5300 gateway hardware features” on page 29
v “N5500 filer hardware features” on page 32
v “N5500 gateway hardware features” on page 36
v “N5600 filer hardware features” on page 39
v “N5600 gateway hardware features” on page 44
v “N7700 filer hardware features” on page 47
v “N7700 gateway hardware features” on page 52
v “N7900 filer hardware features” on page 55
v “N7900 gateway hardware features” on page 60
v “EXN1000 expansion unit hardware features” on page 70
v “EXN2000 expansion unit hardware features” on page 71
v “EXN4000 expansion unit hardware features” on page 72

This chapter also summarizes configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI in
“Configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI” on page 63 and rack mounting
information in “Rack mount requirements” on page 73.

N3300 hardware features


The IBM System Storage N3300 storage controller includes the Model A10, a
single-node base unit, and the Model A20, an active/active dual-node base unit.
Both models are designed to provide fast data access, simultaneous multiprotocol
support, expandability, upgradability, and low maintenance requirements.

The N3300 is designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmission


in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These include the
IBM Eserver System p™, System i™ (NFS only), System x™ and System z™ (NFS
only) servers. Details and current information on N3300 interoperability is available
at:

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI,
see “Configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI” on page 63.

N3300 A10
The N3300 Model A10 is designed to provide a single-node storage controller with
iSCSI support, and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support via optional features. The N3300
Model A10 is a 2U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch
rack. The base chassis includes:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2008 7


v One 2.2 GHz 32-bit processor
v 1 GB random access ECC memory
v Two integrated gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports
v Two integrated 4-Gbps small form factor (SFF) Fibre Channel ports
v One serial console port
v One integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) port
v Redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fans
v Support for 6 to 12 Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) or SATA disk drives

Note: Support for minimal zero drive configuration for attachment to the
EXN1000, EXN2000 or EXN4000 expansion units is available.

The N3300 Model A10 may be upgraded to an N3300 Model A20. The upgrade
from a Model A10 to a Model A20 is a disruptive upgrade.

N3300 A20
The N3300 Model A20 is designed to provide identical function as the N3300 Model
A10, but with the addition of a second processor control module (PCM) and the
Clustered Failover (CFO) licensed function. The Model A20 consists of two PCMs
that are designed to provide failover and failback function, helping improve overall
availability. The Model A20 is a 2U rack-mountable storage controller.

The N3300 Model A20 includes:


v Two 2.2 GHz 32-bit processors
v 2 GB random access ECC memory
v Four integrated gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports
v Four integrated 4-Gbps SFF Fibre Channel ports
v Two serial console ports
v Two integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) ports
v Redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fans
v Support for 6 to 12 Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) or SATA disk drives

Note: Support for minimal zero drive configuration for attachment to the
EXN1000, EXN2000 or EXN4000 expansion units is available.

Connecting expansion units to the N3300


The N3300 storage controller supports both the EXN1000 Serial Advanced
Technology Attachment (SATA) storage expansion unit, and the EXN2000 and
EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units. The maximum number of storage
expansion units that may be attached to either the Model A10 or A20 is four.

The EXN1000 storage expansion unit provides a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosure


containing a minimum of 5, up to a maximum of 14, serial advanced technology
attachment (SATA) disk drives, either in 250 GB, 500 GB, 750 GB, or 1 GB physical
capacities. The EXN2000 and EXN4000 storage expansion units provide a 3U
rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a minimum of 5, up to a maximum of 14,
Fibre Channel disk drives. The EXN2000 and EXN4000 support the following Fibre
Channel disk drive speeds and capacities:
v 15,000 revolutions per minute (15K RPM) of 144 GB and 300 GB capacities
v 10,000 revolutions per minute (10K RPM) of 144 GB and 300 GB capacities

8 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Each storage expansion unit contains a maximum of 14 disk drives, all of a
particular type (rotational speed and capacity). For the initial order of the IBM
System Storage N3300, you may not include storage expansion units containing
more than two types (rotational speed and capacity) of disk drives.

The maximum raw storage capacity of the N3300 system is determined by the
number of disk drives supported. The N3300 Model A10 and Model A20 each
support a maximum of 68 hard disk drives (12 internal and 56 via storage
expansion units).

Table 1 describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for the
N3300 Model A10 and Model A20:
Table 1. N3300 raw storage capacity
Maximum Maximum
Disk drive storage Maximum disk physical
Disk enclosure capacity enclosures drives capacity
Internal 144 GB SAS n/a 12 1.72 TB
disk drives
Internal 300 GB SAS n/a 12 3.60 TB
disk drives
Internal 500 GB SATA n/a 12 6 TB
disk drives
Internal 750 GB SATA n/a 12 9 TB
disk drives
Internal 1 TB SATA disk n/a 12 12 TB
drives
EXN1000 250 GB SATA 4 56 14 TB
disk drives
EXN1000 500 GB SATA 4 56 28 TB
disk drives
EXN1000 750 GB SATA 4 56 42 TB
disk drives
EXN1000 1 TB SATA disk 4 56 56 TB
drives
EXN2000 144 GB Fibre 4 56 8.06 TB
Channel disk
drives
EXN2000 300 GB Fibre 4 56 16.8 TB
Channel disk
drives
EXN4000 144 GB Fibre 4 56 8.06 TB
Channel disk
drives
EXN4000 300 GB Fibre 4 56 16.8 TB
Channel disk
drives

EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not share a Fibre Channel loop with
EXN2000 or EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units.

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 9


N3300 feature codes
Table 2. N3300 feature codes
Description Machine Model Feature
4-Gbps SFP GBIC 2859 A10, A20 2011
144 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 2859 A10, A20 4014
300 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 2859 A10, A20 4015
500 GB SATA HDD 2859 A10, A20 4018
750 GB SATA HDD 2859 A10, A20 4019
1 TB SATA HDD 2859 A10, A20 4020
HDD Blank Panel 2859 A10, A20 4099

Table 3. N3300 installation features codes


Description Machine Model Feature
Field install rack mount kit 2859 A10, A20 9202

The power cord features for the N3300 are listed in Appendix B, “Power cord list for
N series storage systems,” on page 123.

N3600 hardware features


The IBM System Storage N3600 storage controller includes the Model A10, a
single-node base unit, and the Model A20, an active/active dual-node base unit.
Both models are designed to provide fast data access, simultaneous multiprotocol
support, expandability, upgradability, and low maintenance requirements.

The N3600 is designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmission


in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These include the
IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z (NFS only)
servers. Details and current information on N3600 interoperability is available at:

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI,
see “Configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI” on page 63.

N3600 A10
The Model A10 is designed to provide a single-node storage controller with iSCSI
support, and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support via optional features. The N3600 Model
A10 is a 4U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack.
The base chassis includes:
v One 2.2 GHz 32-bit processor
v 2 GB random access ECC memory
v Two integrated gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports
v Two integrated 4-Gbps small form factor (SFF) Fibre Channel ports
v One serial console port
v One integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) port
v Redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fans
v Support for 12 to 20 Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) or SATA disk drives

10 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Note: Support for minimal zero drive configuration for attachment to the
EXN1000, EXN2000 or EXN4000 expansion units is available.

The Model A10 supports a maximum of one dual-path Fibre Channel loop. The
Model A10 can be up upgraded to a maximum of 4 gigabit Ethernet ports via the
addition of one optional dual-port Ethernet NIC (feature number 1012 or 1013). The
Model A10 may be upgraded to a Model A20. The upgrade from a Model A10 to a
Model A20 is a disruptive upgrade.

N3600 A20
The Model A20 is designed to provide identical function as the N3600 Model A10,
but with the addition of a second processor control module (PCM) and the
Clustered Failover (CFO) licensed function. The Model A20 also supports a
maximum of 104 drives. The Model A20 consists of two PCMs that are designed to
provide failover and failback function, helping improve overall availability. The Model
A20 is a 4U rack-mountable storage controller.

The Model A20 includes:


v Two 2.2 GHz 32-bit processors
v 4 GB random access ECC memory
v Four integrated gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports
v Four integrated 4-Gbps SFF Fibre Channel ports
v Two PCIe expansion slots
v Two serial console ports
v Two integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) ports
v Redundant hot-swappable, auto-ranging power supplies and cooling fans
v Support for 12 to 20 Serial Attached SCSI (SAS) or SATA disk drives

Note: Support for minimal zero drive configuration for attachment to the
EXN1000, EXN2000 or EXN4000 expansion units is available.

For the Model A20, the maximum number of additional expansion adapters is two.
The Model A20 supports a maximum of one dual-path Fibre Channel loop. The
Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of eight gigabit Ethernet ports via the
addition of two optional dual-port gigabit Ethernet NIC (feature number 1012 or
1013).

Connecting expansion units to the N3600


The N3600 storage controller Models A10 and A20 can attach a maximum of two
storage expansion units, either EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000.

The EXN1000 storage expansion unit provides a 3U rack-mountable disk enclosure


containing a minimum of 5, up to a maximum of 14, serial advanced technology
attachment (SATA) disk drives, either in 250 GB, 500 GB, 750 GB, or 1 GB physical
capacities. The EXN2000 and EXN4000 storage expansion units provide a 3U
rack-mountable disk enclosure containing a minimum of 5, up to a maximum of 14,
Fibre Channel disk drives. The EXN2000 and EXN4000 support the following Fibre
Channel disk drive speeds and capacities:
v 15,000 revolutions per minute (15K RPM) of 144 GB and 300 GB capacities
v 10,000 revolutions per minute (10K RPM) of 144 GB and 300 GB capacities
Each storage expansion unit contains a maximum of 14 disk drives, all of a
particular type (rotational speed and capacity). For the initial order of the IBM

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 11


System Storage N3600, you may not include storage expansion units containing
more than two types (rotational speed and capacity) of disk drives.

The maximum raw storage capacity of the N3600 system is determined by the
number of disk drives supported. The N3600 Model A10 and Model A20 each
support a maximum of 104 hard disk drives (20 internal and 84 via storage
expansion units).

Table 4 describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for the
N3600 Model A10 and Model A20:
Table 4. N3600 raw storage capacity
Maximum Maximum
Disk drive storage Maximum disk physical
Disk enclosure capacity enclosures drives capacity
Internal 144 GB SAS n/a 20 2.88 TB
disk drives
Internal 300 GB SAS n/a 20 6.00 TB
disk drives
Internal 500 GB SATA n/a 20 10 TB
disk drives
Internal 750 GB SATA n/a 20 15 TB
disk drives
Internal 1 TB SATA disk n/a 20 20 TB
drives
EXN1000 250 GB SATA 6 84 21.00 TB
disk drives
EXN1000 500 GB SATA 6 84 42.00 TB
disk drives
EXN1000 750 GB SATA 6 84 63.00 TB
disk drives
EXN1000 1 TB SATA disk 6 84 84 TB
drives
EXN2000 144 GB Fibre 6 84 12.09 TB
Channel disk
drives
EXN2000 300 GB Fibre 6 84 25.20 TB
Channel disk
drives
EXN4000 144 GB Fibre 6 84 12.09 TB
Channel disk
drives
EXN4000 300 GB Fibre 6 84 25.20 TB
Channel disk
drives

EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units must not share a Fibre Channel loop with
EXN2000 or EXN4000 Fibre Channel storage expansion units.

12 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


N3600 feature codes
Table 5. N3600 feature codes
Description Machine Model Feature
Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) 2862 A10, A20 1012
adapter (optical)
Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet 2862 A10, A20 1013
adapter (copper)
Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2862 A10, A20 1014
HBA for disk attachment
Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2862 A10, A20 1015
HBA for tape attachment
Dual-port GbE iSCSI adapter 2862 A10, A20 1021
(optical)
Dual-port SCSI Ultra320 HBA for 2862 A10, A20 1024
tape attachment
Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI 2862 A10, A20 1026
Target Adapter (copper)
Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2862 A10, A20 1029
HBA for disk attachment
4-Gbps SFP GBIC 2862 A10, A20 2011
144 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 2862 A10, A20 4014
300 GB, 15K RPM SAS HDD 2862 A10, A20 4015
500 GB SATA HDD 2862 A10, A20 4018
750 GB SATA HDD 2862 A10, A20 4019
1 TB SATA HDD 2862 A10, A20 4020
HDD Blank Panel 2862 A10, A20 4099

Table 6. N3600 installation features codes


Description Machine Model Feature
Field install rack mount kit 2862 A10, A20 9202

The power cord features for the N3600 are listed in Appendix B, “Power cord list for
N series storage systems,” on page 123.

N3700 hardware features


The N3700 consists of the Model A10 or Model A20, and its associated software.

The Model A10 is designed to provide a single node filer with NFS, CIFS, iSCSI
and FCP support in a 3U, integrated filer mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. This
base chassis includes redundant hot-plug power supplies with fans and two
integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports.

The N3700 Model A10 is capable of being upgraded to an N3700 Model A20. The
Model A20 is designed to provide identical function as the N3700 Model A10, but
with the addition of the Clustered Failover (CFO) software feature. The N3700
Model A20 consists of two processing nodes in the same enclosure that are
designed to provide failover and failback function, helping improve overall reliability.

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 13


The N3700 can be configured with as few as four disk drives in the Model A10 and
eight in the Model A20, up to a maximum of 14 disk drives (28 disk drives in the
A20). Disk drive types include 72 GB (10,000 or 15,000 rpm), 144 GB (10,000 or
15,000 rpm), and 300 GB (10,000 rpm). Within any single N3700, all disk drives
must be of the same type.

Note: Any N3700 drive bays that do not contain hard disk drives must be
populated with drive blank covers (feature 4099) covering the remaining
drive bays.

The N3700 load board feature enables the N3700 (A10 and A20) to operate in a
SATA-only storage environment. If the N3700 load board is ordered, the N3700 is
ordered with no Fibre Channel hard drives and only EXN1000s (SATA drives) are
attached to the storage controller. For more information about the N3700 load
board, see “Connecting expansion units to the N3700” on page 15.

Attention: If your N3700 storage system shipped with load boards, exactly two
N3700 load boards (FC 4020) and 12 HDD blank fillers (FC 4099) are installed in
the system. The two load boards must be installed in bays 0 and 1.

For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI,
see “Configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI” on page 63.

Understanding the differences between early and current N3700 CPU


modules
N3700 storage systems with system serial numbers between 13-00001 and
13-01000 shipped with an early CPU module design. (In general, these are N3700
systems that shipped prior to January 31, 2006.) Current N3700 systems (with
system serial numbers 13-01001 and higher) ship with the current CPU module
design, which uses different Fibre Channel connectors. (In general, these are
N3700 systems that shipped after January 31, 2006.)

Regardless of the CPU module design, all N3700 storage systems offer the same
functionality. Field repairs or upgrades may use the current CPU module design on
any N3700 system.

The early CPU module is easily distinguished from the current CPU module design
by the rear port labeling, shown in Figure 2. The early CPU module uses an
integrated SFP for Fibre Channel Port C (used for third-party devices), and it uses a
special HSS connector for Fibre Channel Port B to connect the N3700 to expansion
units.

Example: No additional disk shelves

Figure 2. Port labeling for early N3700 CPU module designs

The current CPU module design uses pluggable SFP connections for both Fibre
Channel ports. The current CPU module labeling is shown in Figure 3 on page 15.
The SFP required for connections to the Fibre Channel Port C (used for third-party
devices) is included with all N3700s that ship with the current CPU module design.

14 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


For Port B (used for connections to expansion units), an SFP is required only for
connections using optical cables (recommended). The SFP for Port B is shipped
with the cables ordered with your expansion unit.

Te rm A B
C B
On

Off

Example: No additional disk shelves

Figure 3. Port labeling for current N3700 CPU module designs

Attention: Depending on the design of your N3700 CPU module, direct


connections to expansion units must be made with either Fibre Channel copper
cables or Fibre Channel optical cables, as described in the following bullets:
v For direct connections to N3700 early CPU module designs: Use
NAS-to-EXP Fibre Channel copper cables (FC 2020 or 2022). For attachment to
an N3700 Model A10, one NAS-to-EXP Fibre Channel copper cable is required.
For attachment to an N3700 Model A20, two NAS-to-EXP Fibre Channel copper
cables are required.
v For direct connections to N3700 current CPU module designs: Use an
LC-to-LC Fibre Channel optical cable and two SFPs for attachment to an N3700
Model A10. Use two LC-to-LC Fibre Channel optical cables and four SFPs for
attachment to an N3700 Model A20.

Connecting expansion units to the N3700


Physical capacity of the N3700 can be scaled up to 16.8 TB with the attachment of
up to three IBM System Storage N series EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000
expansion units.
v EXN4000 expansion units can be configured with as few as four disk drives, up
to a maximum of 14, Fibre Channel disk drives of 144-GB or 300-GB physical
capacity.
v EXN2000 expansion units can be configured with as few as four disk drives, up
to a maximum of 14, Fibre Channel disk drives of 72-GB, 144-GB, or 300-GB
physical capacity.
v EXN1000 expansion units can be configured with a minimum of five, up to a
maximum of 14, SATA disk drives of the same capacity. SATA disk drives are
available in 250-GB, 320-GB, 500-GB, 750-GB, and 1-TB capacities.

Note: Any expansion unit drive bays that do not contain hard disk drives must be
populated with drive blank covers (feature 4099) covering the remaining
drive bays.

The N3700 does not support the attachment of mixed expansion unit types. All
expansion units connected to a single N3700 must be either EXN4000s, EXN2000s
or EXN1000s.

Attention: Depending on the CPU module design of your N3700 storage system,
direct connections to expansion units must be made with either Fibre Channel
copper cables or Fibre Channel optical cables, as described in “Understanding the
differences between early and current N3700 CPU modules” on page 14.

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 15


The N3700 supports a maximum of three storage expansion units for a total of 56
disk drives (including the possible fourteen disk drives in the N3700) and a
maximum raw physical storage capacity of 16.8 TB. If attaching EXN1000 SATA
storage expansion units to the N3700, the N3700 base unit must either:
v have the minimum number of Fibre Channel disk drives installed (four for a
Model A10 and eight for a Model A20); or
v have two N3700 load boards (FC 4020) and 12 HDD blank fillers (FC 4099)

In the case where the objective is to have as much low cost SATA storage as
possible, the N3700 can be configured with no Fibre Channel disk drives. In order
to configure the N3700 system (the base unit and expansion units) with no Fibre
Channel disk drives, you must order two HDD load boards (FC 4020) and 12 HDD
blank fillers (FC 4099).

Table 7 describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for the
N3700 Model A10 and Model A20:
Table 7. N3700 raw storage capacity
Maximum Maximum disk Maximum
Disk drive storage drives (including physical
Disk enclosure capacity enclosures 14 in N3700) capacity
EXN4000 144-GB Fibre 3 56 8 TB
Channel disk
drives
EXN4000 300-GB Fibre 3 56 16.8 TB
Channel disk
drives
EXN2000 72-GB Fibre 3 56 4 TB
Channel disk
drives
EXN2000 144-GB Fibre 3 56 8 TB
Channel disk
drives
EXN2000 300-GB Fibre 3 56 16.8 TB
Channel disk
drives
1
EXN1000 250-GB SATA disk 3 56 10.5 TB
drives
EXN1000 320-GB SATA disk 3 56 13.44 TB1
drives
EXN1000 500-GB SATA disk 3 56 14 TB1
drives
1
EXN1000 750-GB SATA disk 3 56 16 TB
drives
1
EXN1000 1 TB SATA disk 3 56 16 TB
drives
1
This number does not include the fourteen possible Fibre Channel disk drives that can be
installed in the N3700 base unit. When the capacity of the Fibre Channel disk drives in the
base N3700 unit is added to this number, the total capacity must not exceed 16.8 TB.

16 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


N3700 feature codes
Table 8. N3700 feature codes
Description Machine Model Feature
72-GB, 10K rpm Fibre Channel 2863 A10, A20 4000
HDD
72-GB, 15K rpm Fibre Channel 2863 A10, A20 4001
HDD
144-GB, 10K rpm Fibre Channel 2863 A10, A20 4002
HDD
144-GB, 15K rpm Fibre Channel 2863 A10, A20 4003
HDD
300-GB, 10K rpm Fibre Channel 2863 A10, A20 4004
HDD
N3700 load board 2863 A10, A20 4020
Drive Blank Cover 2863 A10, A20 4099

Table 9. N3700 installation features codes


Description Machine Model Feature
Field install rack mount kit 2863 A10, A20 9202

The power cord features for the N3700 filer are listed in Appendix B, “Power cord
list for N series storage systems,” on page 123.

N5200 filer hardware features


The IBM System Storage N5200 filers consist of the Model A10 and Model A20,
and associated software.

The N5200 filers are designed to interoperate with products capable of data
transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These
include the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z
(NFS only) servers. Details and current information on N5200 interoperability is
available at:

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI,
see “Configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI” on page 63.

N5200 A10
The N5200 Model A10 is designed to provide a single node filer with NFS, CIFS,
FCP and iSCSI support in a 3U filer mounted in a standard 19-inch rack.

The N5200 Model A10 does not include storage in the base chassis. The base
chassis includes:
v One Intel® 2.8 GHz Xeon® processor
v 2 GB of ECC memory
v 512 MB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)
v Four integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 17


v Four integrated 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or
initiators
v Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans
v Redundant cooling fans
v Three PCI-X expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters
(HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs)
v Front LCD message display

For the N5200 Model A10, the maximum number of all additional PCI-X adapters is
three.

Note: The PCI-X adapters supported by the N5200 and N5500 storage systems
are described in Appendix F, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5200
and N5500 systems,” on page 149.

The Model A10 can have a maximum of four dual-path (redundant) Fibre Channel
storage loops for attaching storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and
EXN4000). On the Model A10, in order to have the maximum number of dual-path
Fibre Channel storage loops, two additional dual-port Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk
Attachment (FC 1004) are needed. The four onboard 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports
can be configured as either FCP Initiators for attaching disk storage expansion units
(EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) or as FCP targets for attaching to Fibre
Channel application hosts (attached either directly or through a Fibre Channel
SAN). If some of the onboard Fibre Channel ports are configured as FCP targets,
then more than two dual-port Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (FC 1004)
are required to reach the maximum of four dual-path Fibre Channel storage loops
for disk storage expansion units.

The Model A10 can be upgraded to a maximum of ten 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports
via the addition of three optional dual-port fiber Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface
cards (NICs) (feature number 1003) or 16 10/100/100 Ethernet ports via the
addition of three optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number
1007).

The Model A10 may be upgraded to a Model A20. The upgrade from a Model A10
to a Model A20 is a disruptive upgrade.

N5200 A20
The N5200 Model A20 is designed to provide identical function as the N5200 Model
A10, but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover
(CFO) software feature. The Model A20 consists of two processing nodes that are
designed to provide failover and failback function, helping improve overall
availability. For the Model A20, each processing node is a 3U rack-mountable filer.
Therefore, the Model A20 occupies a total of 6U of rack space.

The N5200 Model A20 includes:


v Two Intel 2.8 GHz Xeon processors, one per node
v 4 GB of ECC memory, 2 GB per node
v 1 GB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM), 512 MB per node
v Eight integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports, four per node
v Eight integrated 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports, four per node, that can be
configured as targets or initiators
v Four redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans, two per node

18 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


v Redundant cooling fans
v Six PCI-X expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters
(HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs), three per node
(always ordered and installed in pairs)
v Infiniband (IB) cluster cable, which attaches to the NVRAM5 adapter, between
the two processing N5000 nodes
v Front LCD message display

For the N5200 Model A20, the maximum number of all additional PCI-X adapters is
six.

Note: The PCI-X adapters supported by the N5200 and N5500 storage systems
are described in Appendix F, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5200
and N5500 systems,” on page 149.

The Model A20 can have a maximum of eight dual-path (redundant) Fibre Channel
storage loops for attaching storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and
EXN4000). On the Model A20, in order to have the maximum number of dual-path
Fibre Channel storage loops, four additional dual-port Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk
Attachment (FC 1004), two per node, are needed. The onboard 2-Gbps Fibre
Channel ports can be configured as either FCP Initiators for attaching disk storage
expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) or as FCP targets for attaching
to Fibre Channel application hosts (attached either directly or through a Fibre
Channel SAN). If some of the onboard Fibre Channel ports are configured as FCP
targets, then more than four dual-port Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (FC
1004) are required to reach the maximum of eight dual-path Fibre Channel storage
loops for disk storage expansion units.

The N5200 Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of 20 10/100/1000 Ethernet


ports via the addition of six optional dual-port fiber Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature
number 1003) or 32 10/100/100 Ethernet ports via the addition of six optional
quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number 1007).

The physical proximity of the two processing nodes within a Model A20 (with
respect to each other) is determined by which Infiniband cluster interconnect cables
are ordered (feature numbers 1037, 1038, 1039, 1040 and 1041). Optical cables
(feature numbers 1040 and 1041) also require feature number 1042.

Connecting expansion units to the N5200 filer


The N5200 filer Models A10 and A20 require at least one storage expansion unit
per node, either an EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000.

Within a single EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000 expansion unit, all disk drives
must be of a particular type (rotational speed/capacity). Although the original order
for expansion units may contain expansion units with no more than two different
types (rotational speed/capacity) of disk drives, later upgrades to add additional
expansion units do not have to meet this requirement.

The maximum raw storage capacity of the N5200 system varies depending on the
type of disk storage expansion unit (SATA or Fibre Channel) and the capacity of
disk drives used. Table 10 on page 20 describes the maximum supported total
physical storage capacity for both the N5200.

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 19


Table 10. N5200 filer raw storage capacity
Maximum Maximum
Disk drive storage Maximum disk physical
Disk enclosure capacity enclosures drives capacity
EXN1000 250-GB SATA disk 12 168 42 TB
drives
EXN1000 320-GB SATA disk 12 168 53.76 TB
drives
EXN1000 500-GB SATA disk 12 168 84 TB
drives
EXN1000 750-GB SATA disk 12 112 84 TB
drives
EXN1000 1 TB SATA disk 12 84 84 TB
drives
EXN2000 72-GB Fibre 12 168 12 TB
Channel disk
drives
EXN2000 144-GB Fibre 12 168 24 TB
Channel disk
drives
EXN2000 300-GB Fibre 12 168 50 TB
Channel disk
drives
EXN4000 144-GB Fibre 12 168 24 TB
Channel disk
drives
EXN4000 300-GB Fibre 12 168 50 TB
Channel disk
drives

EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units and EXN2000/EXN4000 Fibre Channel


storage expansion units must not share Fibre Channel loops. A maximum of six
storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) are supported on a
single Fibre Channel loop.

Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for the N5200 filer. Dual-path Fibre
Channel cabling is designed to improve reliability, availability and serviceability of
the expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating two redundant
paths from each storage controller to each loop of the expansion units. For more
information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see the Installation and
Setup Instructions that came with your system.

N5200 filer feature codes


Table 11. N5200 filer feature codes
Description Machine Model Feature
Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter 2864 A10, A20 1003
(optical)
Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for 2864 A10, A20 1004
Disk Attachment (filer)

20 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Table 11. N5200 filer feature codes (continued)
Description Machine Model Feature
Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for 2864 A10, A20 1005
Tape
Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for 2864 A20 1006
Disk Attachment (gateways and
MetroCluster filer configurations)
Quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet 2864 A10, A20 1007
adapter (copper)
Single-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10 2864 A10, A20 1008
GbE) adapter (optical)
Quad-Port GbE TOE NIC (copper) 2864 A10, A20 1009
Dual-port GbE iSCSI target 2864 A10, A20 1010
adapter (copper)
Dual-port GbE iSCSI target 2864 A10, A20 1011
adapter (optical)
SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel LVD 2864 A10, A20 1016
Tape Adapter
Dual-port MetroCluster VI Fibre 2864 A20 1018
Channel HBA
Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2864 A10, A20 1019
target HBA
Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet 2864 A10, A20 1020
adapter (copper)
Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2864 A10, A20 1027
HBA for Disk
SnapMirror over Fibre Channel 2864 A10, A20 1034
HBA
2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2864 A20 1037
5m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2864 A20 1038
10m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2864 A20 1039
5m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2864 A20 1040
30m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2864 A20 1041
Copper-Fiber Converter 2864 A20 1042
1
5m 50-micron MMF Cable 2864 A10, A20 1045
1
30m 50-micron MMF Cable 2864 A10, A20 1046
1
For use with the single-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10 GbE) adapter (optical) (1008).

Table 12. N5200 filer installation features codes


Description Machine Model Feature
Field install rack mount kit 2864 A10, A20 9202

The power cord features for the N5200 filer are listed in Appendix B, “Power cord
list for N series storage systems,” on page 123.

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 21


N5200 gateway hardware features
The IBM System Storage N5200 gateways consist of the Model G10 and Model
G20, and associated software.

The N5200 gateways are designed to interoperate with products capable of data
transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These
include the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z
(NFS only) servers. Details and current information on N5200 interoperability is
available at:

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI,
see “Configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI” on page 63.

For more information about planning for your N series gateway system, refer to the
IBM System Storage N series Gateway Planning Guide for your version of Data
ONTAP.

N5200 G10
The N5200 Model G10 is designed to provide a single node gateway with NFS,
CIFS, FCP and iSCSI support in a 3U gateway mounted in a standard 19-inch rack.

The N5200 Model G10 gateway does not include storage in the base chassis. The
base chassis includes:
v One Intel 2.8 GHz Xeon processor
v 2 GB of ECC memory
v 512 MB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)
v Four integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports
v Four integrated 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or
initiators
v Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans
v Redundant cooling fans
v Three PCI-X expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters
(HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs)
v Front LCD message display

For the N5200 Model G10, the maximum number of all additional PCI-X adapters is
three.

Note: The PCI-X adapters supported by the N5200 and N5500 storage systems
are described in Appendix F, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5200
and N5500 systems,” on page 149.

The onboard 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports can be configured as either FCP initiators
for attaching to SAN storage or as FCP targets for attaching to Fibre Channel
application hosts (attached either directly or through a Fibre Channel SAN).

The Model G10 can be upgraded to a maximum of ten 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports
via the addition of three optional dual-port fiber Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface

22 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


cards (NICs) (feature number 1003) or 16 10/100/100 Ethernet ports via the
addition of three optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number
1007).

N5200 G20
The N5200 Model G20 is designed to provide identical function as the N5200 Model
G10, but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover
(CFO) software feature. The Model G20 consists of two processing nodes that are
designed to provide failover and failback function, helping improve overall
availability. For the Model G20, each processing node is a 3U rack-mountable
gateway. Therefore, the Model G20 occupies a total of 6U of rack space.

The N5200 Model G20 includes:


v Two Intel 2.8 GHz Xeon processors, one per node
v 4 GB of ECC memory, 2 GB per node
v 1 GB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM), 512 MB per node
v Eight integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports, four per node
v Eight integrated 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports, four per node, that can be
configured as targets or initiators
v Four redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans, two per node
v Redundant cooling fans
v Six PCI-X expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters
(HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs), three per node
(always ordered and installed in pairs)
v Infiniband (IB) cluster cable, which attaches to the NVRAM5 adapter, between
the two processing N5000 nodes
v Front LCD message display

For the N5200 Model G20, the maximum number of all additional PCI-X adapters is
six.

Note: The PCI-X adapters supported by the N5200 and N5500 storage systems
are described in Appendix F, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5200
and N5500 systems,” on page 149.

The onboard 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports can be configured as either FCP initiators
for attaching to SAN storage or as FCP targets for attaching to Fibre Channel
application hosts (attached either directly or through a Fibre Channel SAN).

The Model G20 can be upgraded to a maximum of 20 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports


via the addition of six optional dual-port fiber Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number
1003) or 32 10/100/100 Ethernet ports via the addition of six optional quad-port
copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number 1007).

The physical proximity of the two processing nodes within a Model G20 (with
respect to each other) is determined by which Infiniband cluster interconnect cables
are ordered (feature numbers 1037, 1038, 1039, 1040 and 1041). Optical cables
(feature numbers 1040 and 1041) also require feature number 1042.

Connecting a gateway to external storage


You must use fiber optic cables to connect a gateway to external storage on a Fibre
Channel SAN.

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 23


See the Interoperability Matrix at the following Web site for supported devices for
your N5000 series gateway.

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

Refer to the documentation for your external storage for additional information.

N5200 gateway feature codes


Table 13. N5200 gateway feature codes
Description Machine Model Feature
Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter 2864 G10, G20 1003
(optical)
Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for 2864 G10, G20 1005
Tape
Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for 2864 G10, G20 1006
Disk Attachment (gateways and
MetroCluster filer configurations)
Quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet 2864 G10, G20 1007
adapter (copper)
Single-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10 2864 G10, G20 1008
GbE) (optical)
Quad-Port GbE TOE NIC (copper) 2864 A10, A20 1009
Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter 2864 G10, G20 1010
(copper)
Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter 2864 G10, G20 1011
(optical)
SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel LVD 2864 G10, G20 1016
Tape Adapter
Dual-port MetroCluster VI Fibre 2864 G20 1018
Channel HBA
Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2864 G10, G20 1019
target HBA
Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet 2864 G10, G20 1020
adapter (copper)
SnapMirror over Fibre Channel 2864 G10, G20 1034
HBA
2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2864 G20 1037
5m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2864 G20 1038
10m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2864 G20 1039
5m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2864 G20 1040
30m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2864 G20 1041
Copper-Fiber Converter 2864 G20 1042
5m 50-micron MMF Cable 2864 G10, G20 1045
30m 50-micron MMF Cable 2864 G10, G20 1046
4-Gbps Extended Long-wave SFP 2864 G20 1050
1
For use with the single-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10 GbE) adapter (optical) (1008).

24 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Table 14. N5200 gateway installation features codes
Description Machine Model Feature
Field install rack mount kit 2864 G10, G20 9202

The power cord features for the N5200 gateway are listed in Appendix B, “Power
cord list for N series storage systems,” on page 123.

N5300 filer hardware features


The IBM System Storage N5300 filers consist of the Model A10 or Model A20, and
associated software.

The N5300 filers are designed to interoperate with products capable of data
transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These
include the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z
(NFS only) servers. Details and current information on N5300 interoperability is
available at:

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI,
see “Configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI” on page 63.

N5300 A10
The N5300 Model A10 is designed to provide a single-node filer with NFS, CIFS,
FCP, and iSCSI support in a 3U filer mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The
N5300 Model A10 does not include disk storage in the base chassis. This base
chassis includes:
v Two 2.4 GHz 64-bit processors
v 4 GB of ECC memory
v 512 MB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)
v Four integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports
v Four integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or
initiators
v Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans
v Redundant cooling fans
v Three PCI-Express (PCIe) expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus
Adapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs)
v One integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) port
v One serial console port
v Front LCD message display

All the adapter card slots of the N5300 are PCI-Express (PCIe) slots. For the
N5300 Model A10, the maximum number of all additional PCIe adapters is three. A
fourth expansion slot is used for the standard (included with the N5300) 512 MB
NVRAM adapter card.

Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N5300 storage system are described in
Appendix G, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600
systems,” on page 157.

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 25


The Model A10 can be upgraded to a maximum of five dual-path Fibre Channel
loops (10 Fibre Channel ports) via the addition of three optional Fibre Channel
HBAs for Disk Attachment (feature number 1014). The five loops will support a
maximum of 252 total disk drives.

The Model A10 can be up upgraded to a maximum of 16 gigabit Ethernet ports via
the addition of three optional quad-port copper NICs (feature number 1022 or
1023).

The Model A10 may be upgraded to an N5300 Model A20. The upgrade from a
Model A10 to a Model A20 is a disruptive upgrade.

Note: It is not possible to upgrade an N5200 or N5500 storage system to an


N5300 storage system.

N5300 A20
The N5300 Model A20 is designed to provide identical function as the Model A10,
but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover (CFO)
software feature. The Model A20 consists of two processing nodes that are
designed to provide takeover and failback function, helping improve overall
availability. For the Model A20, each processing node is a 3U rack-mountable filer.
Therefore, the N5300 Model A20 occupies a total of 6U of rack space.

The N5300 Model A20 includes:


v Four 2.4 GHz 64-bit processors
v 8 GB of DDR-400 ECC memory
v 1 GB (512 MB per node) of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)
v Eight integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports
v Eight integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or
initiators
v Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans
v Redundant cooling fans
v Six PCI-Express (PCIe) expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus
Adapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs)
v Two integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) ports
v Two serial console ports
v Front LCD message display

All the adapter card slots of the N5300 are PCI-Express (PCIe) slots. For the
N5300 Model A20, the maximum number of all additional PCIe adapters is six.

Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N5300 storage system are described in
Appendix G, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600
systems,” on page 157.

The Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of ten dual-path Fibre Channel
loops (20 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports) via the addition of six optional Fibre Channel
HBA for Disk Attachments (feature number 1014). The ten loops will support a
maximum of 252 total disk drives.

The Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of 32 Gigabit Ethernet ports via the
addition of six optional quad-port copper gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number
1022 or 1023).

26 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


The physical proximity of the two processing nodes within a Model A20 (with
respect to each other) is determined by which Infiniband cluster interconnect cables
are ordered (feature numbers 1037, 1038, 1039, 1040 and 1041). Optical cables
(feature numbers 1040 and 1041) also require feature number 1042.

Connecting expansion units to the N5300 filer


Both N5300 filer models require the addition of at least one storage expansion unit,
either an EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000.

Within a single EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000 expansion unit, all disk drives
must be of a particular type (rotational speed/capacity). Although the original order
for expansion units may contain expansion units with no more than two different
types (rotational speed/capacity) of disk drives, later upgrades to add additional
expansion units do not have to meet this requirement.

The maximum physical storage capacity of the N5300 system varies depending on
the type of disk storage expansion unit (SATA or Fibre Channel) and the capacity of
disk drives used. Table 15 describes the maximum supported total physical storage
capacity for the N5300.
Table 15. N5300 raw storage capacity
Maximum Maximum
Disk drive storage Maximum disk physical
Disk enclosure capacity enclosures drives capacity
EXN1000 250-GB SATA disk 24 336 84 TB
drives
EXN1000 500-GB SATA disk 24 336 168 TB
drives
EXN1000 750-GB SATA disk 24 336 252 TB
drives
EXN1000 1 TB SATA disk 24 336 336 TB
drives
EXN2000 144-GB Fibre 24 336 48.384 TB
Channel disk
drives
EXN2000 300-GB Fibre 24 336 100.8 TB
Channel disk
drives
EXN4000 144-GB Fibre 24 336 48.384 TB
Channel disk
drives
EXN4000 300-GB Fibre 24 336 100.8 TB
Channel disk
drives

EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units and EXN2000/EXN4000 Fibre Channel


storage expansion units must not share Fibre Channel loops. A maximum of six
storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) are supported on a
single Fibre Channel loop.

Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for the N5300 filer. Dual-path Fibre
Channel cabling is designed to improve reliability, availability and serviceability of
the expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating two redundant

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 27


paths from each storage controller to each loop of the expansion units. For more
information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see the Installation and
Setup Instructions that came with your system.

N5300 filer feature codes


Table 16. N5300 filer feature codes
Feature
Feature Code Description Machine Model Code
Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet 2869 A10, A20 1012
adapter (optical)
Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet 2869 A10, A20 1013
adapter (copper)
Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2869 A10, A20 1014
HBA for disk attachment
Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2869 A10, A20 1015
HBA for tape attachment
Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2869 A10, A20 1017
target HBA
Dual-port GbE iSCSI adapter 2869 A10, A20 1021
(optical)
Quad-port GbE Ethernet TOE 2869 A10, A20 1022
adapter (copper)
Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter 2869 A10, A20 1023
(copper)
Dual-port SCSI Ultra320 HBA for 2869 A10, A20 1024
tape attachment
Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI 2869 A10, A20 1026
Target Adapter (copper)
Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2869 A10, A20 1029
HBA for disk attachment
Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet 2869 A10, A20 1031
adapter
Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA 2869 A20 1032
(A20/G20 models only)
SnapMirror over Fibre Channel 2869 A10, A20 1033
HBA
Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2869 A10, A20 1035
HBA for tape and disk
attachment
2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2869 A20 1037
5m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2869 A20 1038
10m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2869 A20 1039
5m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2869 A20 1040
30m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2869 A20 1041
Copper-Fiber Converter 2869 A20 1042

28 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Table 17. N5300 filer installation feature codes
Description Machine Model Feature
Field install rack mount kit 2868 A10, A20 9202

The power cord features for the N5300 filer are listed in Appendix B, “Power cord
list for N series storage systems,” on page 123.

N5300 gateway hardware features


The IBM System Storage N5300 gateways consist of the Model G10 and Model
G20, and associated software.

The Model G10 is designed to provide a single node gateway with NFS, CIFS, FCP
and iSCSI support in a 3U gateway mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The Model
G20 provides an active/active dual-node base unit.

The N5300 gateways are designed to interoperate with products capable of data
transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These
include the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z
(NFS only) servers. Details and current information on N5300 gateway
interoperability is available at:

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI,
see “Configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI” on page 63.

For more information about planning for your N series gateway system, refer to the
IBM System Storage N series Gateway Planning Guide for your version of Data
ONTAP.

N5300 Model G10


The N5300 Model G10 gateway does not include storage in the base chassis. The
base chassis includes:
v Two AMD 2.4 GHz 64-bit Opteron processors (per node), each with 1 MB of level
2 cache
v Four GB random access ECC memory
v Up to five backend Fibre Channel loops per node
v 512 MB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)
v 252 logical unit numbers (LUNs) support for both Model G10 and Model G20
v Four integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports (ten with the addition of expansion
HBA features)
v Four integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or
initiators
v Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans
v Redundant cooling fans
v Three PCI-Express (PCIe) expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus
Adapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs)
v Front LCD message display

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 29


All the adapter card slots of the N5300 are PCI-Express (PCIe) slots. For the
N5300 Model G10, the maximum number of all additional PCIe adapters is three.

Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N5300 and N5600 storage systems are
described in Appendix G, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and
N5600 systems,” on page 157.

The Model G10 may be upgraded to a Model G20. The upgrade from a Model G10
to a Model G20 is a disruptive upgrade.

N5300 Model G20


The N5300 Model G20 is designed to provide identical function as the N5300 Model
G10, but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover
(CFO) software feature. The Model G20 consists of two processing nodes that are
designed to provide failover and failback function, helping improve overall
availability. For the Model G20, each processing node is a 3U rack-mountable
gateway. Therefore, the Model G20 occupies a total of 6U of rack space.

The N5300 Model G20 includes:


v Four AMD 2.4 GHz 64-bit Opteron processors (per node), each with 1 MB of
level 2 cache
v Eight GB random access ECC memory
v Up to ten backend Fibre Channel loops
v 1 GB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)
v 252 logical unit numbers (LUNs) support for both Model G10 and Model G20
v Four integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports (ten with the addition of expansion
HBA features)
v Four integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or
initiators
v Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans
v Redundant cooling fans
v Six PCI-Express (PCIe) expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus
Adapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs), three per
node (always ordered and installed in pairs)
v Infiniband (IB) cluster cable, which attaches to the NVRAM6 adapter, between
the two processing N5000 nodes
v Front LCD message display

All the adapter card slots of the N5300 are PCI-Express (PCIe) slots. The maximum
number of adapters that may be added to the N5300 Model G20 is six. When
adapter cards are ordered for the Model G20 on the initial order, they must be
ordered and added in pairs, one per node, so that both nodes are populated with
the same number of each type of PCIe adapters.

Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N5300 and N5600 storage systems are
described in Appendix G, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and
N5600 systems,” on page 157.

The physical proximity of the two processing nodes within a Model G20 (with
respect to each other) is determined by which Infiniband cluster interconnect cables
are ordered (feature numbers 1037, 1038, 1039, 1040 and 1041). Optical cables
(feature numbers 1040 and 1041) also require feature number 1042.

30 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Connecting a gateway to external storage
You must use fiber optic cables to connect a gateway to external storage on a Fibre
Channel SAN.

See the Interoperability Matrix at the following Web site for supported devices for
your N5000 series gateway system.

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

Refer to the documentation for your external storage for additional information.

N5300 gateway feature codes


Table 18. N5300 gateway feature codes
Description Machine Model Feature
Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) 2869 G10, G20 1012
adapter (optical)
Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet 2869 G10, G20 1013
adapter (copper)
Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2869 G10, G20 1014
HBA - Disk
Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2869 G10, G20 1015
HBA - Tape
Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2869 G10, G20 1017
HBA-Target
Dual-port GbE iSCSI adapter 2869 G10, G20 1021
(optical)
Quad-port GbE Ethernet TOE 2869 G10, G20 1022
adapter (copper)
Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter 2869 G10, G20 1023
(copper)
Dual-port SCSI Ultra320 HBA for 2869 G10, G20 1024
tape attachment
Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI 2869 G10, G20 1026
Target Adapter (copper)
Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter 2869 G10, G20 1031
Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA 2869 G20 1032
SnapMirror over Fibre Channel 2869 G10, G20 1033
HBA
2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2869 G20 1037
5m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2869 G20 1038
10m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2869 G20 1039
5m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2869 G20 1040
30m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2869 G20 1041
Copper-Fiber Converter 2869 G20 1042
4-Gbps Extended Long-wave SFP 2869 G20 1050

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 31


Table 19. N5300 gateway installation features codes
Description Machine Model Feature
Field install rack mount kit 2869 G10, G20 9202

The power cord features for the N5300 gateway are listed in Appendix B, “Power
cord list for N series storage systems,” on page 123.

N5500 filer hardware features


The IBM System Storage N5500 filers consist of the Model A10 or Model A20, and
associated software.

The N5500 filers are designed to interoperate with products capable of data
transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These
include the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z
(NFS only) servers. Details and current information on N5500 interoperability is
available at:

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI,
see “Configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI” on page 63.

N5500 A10
The N5500 Model A10 is designed to provide a single-node filer with NFS, CIFS,
FCP, and iSCSI support in a 3U filer mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The
N5500 filer does not include disk storage in the base chassis. This base chassis
includes:
v Two Intel 2.8 GHz Xeon processors
v 4 GB of ECC memory
v 512 MB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)
v Four integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports
v Four integrated 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or
initiators
v Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans
v Redundant cooling fans
v Three PCI-X expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters
(HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs)
v Front LCD message display

For the N5500 Model A10, the maximum number of all additional PCI-X adapters is
three.

Note: The PCI-X adapters supported by the N5200 and N5500 storage systems
are described in Appendix F, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5200
and N5500 systems,” on page 149.

The N5500 Model A10 can have a maximum of four dual-path (redundant) Fibre
Channel storage loops for attaching storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000,
and EXN4000). On the Model A10, in order to have the maximum number of
dual-path Fibre Channel storage loops, two additional dual-port Fibre Channel

32 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


HBAs for Disk Attachment (FC 1004) are needed. The onboard 2-Gbps Fibre
Channel ports can be configured as either FCP Initiators for attaching disk storage
expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) or as FCP targets for attaching
to Fibre Channel application hosts (attached either directly or through a Fibre
Channel SAN). If some of the onboard Fibre Channel ports are configured as FCP
targets, then more than two dual-port Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (FC
1004) are required to reach the maximum of four dual-path Fibre Channel storage
loops for disk storage expansion units.

The N5500 Model A10 can be upgraded to a maximum of ten 10/100/1000 Ethernet
ports via the addition of three optional dual-port fiber Gigabit Ethernet Network
Interface cards (NICs) (feature number 1003) or 16 10/100/100 Ethernet ports via
the addition of three optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature
number 1007).

The Model A10 may be upgraded to an N5500 Model A20. The upgrade from a
Model A10 to a Model A20 is a disruptive upgrade.

N5500 A20
The N5500 Model A20 is designed to provide identical function as the Model A10,
but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover (CFO)
software feature. The N5500 Model A20 consists of two processing nodes that are
designed to provide takeover and failback function, helping improve overall
availability. For the Model A20, each processing node is a 3U rack-mountable filer.
Therefore, the Model A20 occupies a total of 6U of rack space.

Note: It is not possible to upgrade an N5200 storage system to an N5500 storage


system.

The N5500 Model A20 includes:


v Four Intel 2.8 GHz Xeon processors, two per node
v 8 GB of ECC memory, 4 GB per node
v 1 GB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM), 512 MB per node
v Eight integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports, four per node
v Eight integrated 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports, four per node, that can be
configured as targets or initiators
v Four redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans, two per node
v Redundant cooling fans
v Six PCI-X expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters
(HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs), three per node
(always ordered and installed in pairs)
v Infiniband (IB) cluster cable, which attaches to the NVRAM5 adapter, between
the two processing N5000 nodes
v Front LCD message display

For the N5500 Model A20, the maximum number of all additional PCI-X adapters is
six.

Note: The PCI-X adapters supported by the N5200 and N5500 storage systems
are described in Appendix F, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5200
and N5500 systems,” on page 149.

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 33


The N5500 Model A20 can have a maximum of eight dual-path (redundant) Fibre
Channel storage loops for attaching storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000,
and EXN4000). On the Model A20, in order to have the maximum number of
dual-path Fibre Channel storage loops, four additional dual-port Fibre Channel
HBAs for Disk Attachment (FC 1004), two per node, are needed. The onboard
2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports can be configured as either FCP Initiators for attaching
disk storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) or as FCP targets
for attaching to Fibre Channel application hosts (attached either directly or through
a Fibre Channel SAN). If some of the onboard Fibre Channel ports are configured
as FCP targets, then more than four dual-port Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk
Attachment (FC 1004) are required to reach the maximum of eight dual-path Fibre
Channel storage loops for disk storage expansion units.

The N5500 Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of 20 10/100/1000 Ethernet


ports via the addition of six optional dual-port fiber Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature
number 1003) or 32 10/100/100 Ethernet ports via the addition of six optional
quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number 1007).

The physical proximity of the two processing nodes within a Model A20 (with
respect to each other) is determined by which Infiniband cluster interconnect cables
are ordered (feature numbers 1037, 1038, 1039, 1040 and 1041). Optical cables
(feature numbers 1040 and 1041) also require feature number 1042.

Connecting expansion units to the N5500 filer


Both N5500 filer models require the addition of at least one storage expansion unit,
either an EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000.

Within a single EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000 expansion unit, all disk drives
must be of a particular type (rotational speed/capacity). Although the original order
for expansion units may contain expansion units with no more than two different
types (rotational speed/capacity) of disk drives, later upgrades to add additional
expansion units do not have to meet this requirement.

The maximum physical storage capacity of the N5500 system varies depending on
the type of disk storage expansion unit (SATA or Fibre Channel) and the capacity of
disk drives used. Table 20 describes the maximum supported total physical storage
capacity for the N5500.
Table 20. N5500 raw storage capacity
Maximum Maximum
Disk drive storage Maximum disk physical
Disk enclosure capacity enclosures drives capacity
EXN1000 250-GB SATA disk 24 336 84 TB
drives
EXN1000 320-GB SATA disk 24 336 107.52 TB
drives
EXN1000 500-GB SATA disk 24 336 168 TB
drives
EXN1000 750-GB SATA disk 24 224 168 TB
drives
EXN1000 1 TB SATA disk 24 168 168 TB
drives

34 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Table 20. N5500 raw storage capacity (continued)
Maximum Maximum
Disk drive storage Maximum disk physical
Disk enclosure capacity enclosures drives capacity
EXN2000 72-GB Fibre 24 336 24 TB
Channel disk
drives
EXN2000 144-GB Fibre 24 336 48 TB
Channel disk
drives
EXN2000 300-GB Fibre 24 336 100.8 TB
Channel disk
drives
EXN4000 144-GB Fibre 24 336 48 TB
Channel disk
drives
EXN4000 300-GB Fibre 24 336 100.8 TB
Channel disk
drives

EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units and EXN2000 or EXN4000 Fibre Channel
storage expansion units must not share Fibre Channel loops. A maximum of six
storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) are supported on a
single Fibre Channel loop.

Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for the N5500 filer. Dual-path Fibre
Channel cabling is designed to improve reliability, availability and serviceability of
the expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating two redundant
paths from each storage controller to each loop of the expansion units. For more
information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see the Installation and
Setup Instructions that came with your system.

N5500 filer feature codes


Table 21. N5500 filer feature codes
Description Machine Model Feature
Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter 2865 A10, A20 1003
(optical)
Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for 2865 A10, A20 1004
Disk Attachment (filer)
Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for 2865 A10, A20 1005
Tape
Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for 2865 A20 1006
Disk Attachment (gateways and
MetroCluster filer configurations)
Quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet 2865 A10, A20 1007
adapter (copper)
Single-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10 2865 A10, A20 1008
GbE) (optical)
Quad-Port GbE TOE NIC (copper) 2864 A10, A20 1009

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 35


Table 21. N5500 filer feature codes (continued)
Description Machine Model Feature
Dual-port GbE iSCSI target 2865 A10, A20 1010
adapter (copper)
Dual-port GbE iSCSI target 2865 A10, A20 1011
adapter (optical)
SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel LVD 2865 A10, A20 1016
Tape Adapter
Dual-port MetroCluster VI Fibre 2865 A20 1018
Channel HBA
Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2865 A10, A20 1019
target HBA
Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet 2865 A10, A20 1020
adapter (copper)
Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2865 A10, A20 1027
HBA for Disk
SnapMirror over Fibre Channel 2865 A10, A20 1034
HBA
2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2865 A20 1037
5m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2865 A20 1038
10m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2865 A20 1039
5m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2865 A20 1040
30m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2865 A20 1041
Copper-Fiber Converter 2865 A20 1042
5m 50-micron MMF Cable 2865 A10, A20 1045
30m 50-micron MMF Cable 2865 A10, A20 1046
1
For use with the single-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10 GbE) adapter (optical) (1008).

Table 22. N5500 filer installation feature codes


Description Machine Model Feature
Field install rack mount kit 2865 A10, A20 9202

The power cord features for the N5500 filer are listed in Appendix B, “Power cord
list for N series storage systems,” on page 123.

N5500 gateway hardware features


The IBM System Storage N5500 gateways consist of the Model G10 or Model G20,
and associated software.

For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI,
see “Configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI” on page 63.

For more information about planning for your N series gateway system, refer to the
IBM System Storage N series Gateway Planning Guide for your version of Data
ONTAP.

36 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


N5500 G10
The N5500 Model G10 is designed to provide a single-node gateway with NFS,
CIFS, FCP, and iSCSI support in a 3U gateway mounted in a standard 19-inch
rack. The N5500 gateway does not include disk storage in the base chassis. This
base chassis includes:
v Two Intel 2.8 GHz Xeon processors
v 4 GB of ECC memory
v 512 MB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)
v Four integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports
v Four integrated 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or
initiators
v Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans
v Redundant cooling fans
v Three PCI-X expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters
(HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs)
v Front LCD message display

For the N5500 Model G10, the maximum number of all additional PCI-X adapters is
three.

Note: The PCI-X adapters supported by the N5200 and N5500 storage systems
are described in Appendix F, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5200
and N5500 systems,” on page 149.

The onboard 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports can be configured as either FCP initiators
for attaching to SAN storage or as FCP targets for attaching to Fibre Channel
application hosts (attached either directly or through a Fibre Channel SAN).

The N5500 Model G10 can be upgraded to a maximum of ten 10/100/1000


Ethernet ports via the addition of three optional dual-port fiber Gigabit Ethernet
Network Interface cards (NICs) (feature number 1003) or 16 10/100/100 Ethernet
ports via the addition of three optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs
(feature number 1007).

Note: It is not possible to upgrade an N5200 storage system to an N5500 storage


system.

N5500 G20
The N5500 Model G20 is designed to provide identical function as the Model G10,
but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover (CFO)
software feature. The N5500 Model G20 consists of two processing nodes that are
designed to provide takeover and failback function, helping improve overall
availability. For the Model G20, each processing node is a 3U rack-mountable filer.
Therefore, the Model G20 occupies a total of 6U of rack space.

The N5500 Model G20 includes:


v Four Intel 2.8 GHz Xeon processors, two per node
v 8 GB of ECC memory, 4 GB per node
v 1 GB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM), 512 MB per node
v Eight integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports, four per node

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 37


v Eight integrated 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports, four per node, that can be
configured as targets or initiators
v Four redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans, two per node
v Redundant cooling fans
v Six PCI-X expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus Adapters
(HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs), three per node
(always ordered and installed in pairs)
v Infiniband (IB) cluster cable, which attaches to the NVRAM5 adapter, between
the two processing N5000 nodes
v Front LCD message display

For the N5500 Model G20, the maximum number of all additional PCI-X adapters is
six.

Note: The PCI-X adapters supported by the N5200 and N5500 storage systems
are described in Appendix F, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5200
and N5500 systems,” on page 149.

The onboard 2-Gbps Fibre Channel ports can be configured as either FCP initiators
for attaching to SAN storage or as FCP targets for attaching to Fibre Channel
application hosts (attached either directly or through a Fibre Channel SAN).

The N5500 Model G20 can be upgraded to a maximum of 20 10/100/1000 Ethernet


ports via the addition of six optional dual-port fiber Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature
number 1003) or 32 10/100/100 Ethernet ports via the addition of six optional
quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number 1007).

The physical proximity of the two processing nodes within a Model G20 (with
respect to each other) is determined by which Infiniband cluster interconnect cables
are ordered (feature numbers 1037, 1038, 1039, 1040 and 1041). Optical cables
(feature numbers 1040 and 1041) also require feature number 1042.

Connecting a gateway to external storage


You must use fiber optic cables to connect a gateway to external storage on a Fibre
Channel SAN.

See the Interoperability Matrix at the following Web site for supported devices for
your N5000 series gateway system.

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

Refer to the documentation for your external storage for additional information.

N5500 gateway feature codes


Table 23. N5500 gateway feature codes
Description Machine Model Feature
Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter 2865 G10, G20 1003
(optical)
Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for 2865 G10, G20 1005
Tape

38 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Table 23. N5500 gateway feature codes (continued)
Description Machine Model Feature
Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for 2865 G10, G20 1006
Disk Attachment (gateways and
MetroCluster filer configurations)
Quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet 2865 G10, G20 1007
adapter (copper)
Single-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10 2865 G10, G20 1008
GbE) (optical)
Quad-Port GbE TOE NIC (copper) 2864 A10, A20 1009
Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter 2865 G10, G20 1010
(copper)
Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter 2865 G10, G20 1011
(optical)
SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel LVD 2865 G10, G20 1016
Tape Adapter
Dual-port MetroCluster VI Fibre 2865 G20 1018
Channel HBA
Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2865 G10, G20 1019
target HBA
Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet 2865 G10, G20 1020
adapter (copper)
SnapMirror over Fibre Channel 2865 G10, G20 1034
HBA
2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2865 G20 1037
5m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2865 G20 1038
10m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2865 G20 1039
5m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2865 G20 1040
30m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2865 G20 1041
Copper-Fiber Converter 2865 G20 1042
5m 50-micron MMF Cable 2865 G10, G20 1045
30m 50-micron MMF Cable 2865 G10, G20 1046
4-Gbps Extended Long-wave SFP 2865 G20 1050
1
For use with the single-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10 GbE) adapter (optical) (1008).

Table 24. N5500 gateway installation feature codes


Description Machine Model Feature
Field install rack mount kit 2865 G10, G20 9202

The power cord features for the N5500 gateway are listed in Appendix B, “Power
cord list for N series storage systems,” on page 123.

N5600 filer hardware features


The IBM System Storage N5600 filers consist of the Model A10 or Model A20, and
associated software.

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 39


The N5600 filers are designed to interoperate with products capable of data
transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These
include the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z
(NFS only) servers. Details and current information on N5600 interoperability is
available at:

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI,
see “Configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI” on page 63.

N5600 A10
The N5600 Model A10 is designed to provide a single-node filer with NFS, CIFS,
FCP, and iSCSI support in a 3U filer mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The
N5600 filer does not include disk storage in the base chassis. This base chassis
includes:
v Two 1.8 GHz 64-bit processors
v 8 GB of DDR-400 ECC memory
v 512 MB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)
v Four integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports
v Four integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or
initiators
v Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans
v Redundant cooling fans
v Three PCI-Express (PCIe) expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus
Adapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs)
v One integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) port
v One serial console port
v Front LCD message display

For the N5600 Model A10, the maximum number of all additional PCIe adapters is
three. A fourth expansion slot is used for the standard (included with the N5600)
512 MB NVRAM adapter card.

Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N5600 storage system are described in
Appendix G, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600
systems,” on page 157.

The N5600 Model A10 can be upgraded to a maximum of five dual-path Fibre
Channel loops (10 Fibre Channel ports) via the addition of three optional Fibre
Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (feature number 1014). The five loops will
support a maximum of 420 total disk drives.

The Model A10 can be up upgraded to a maximum of 16 gigabit Ethernet ports via
the addition of three optional quad-port copper NICs (feature number 1022 or
1023).

The Model A10 may be upgraded to an N5600 Model A20. The upgrade from a
Model A10 to a Model A20 is a disruptive upgrade.

Note: It is not possible to upgrade an N5200 or N5500 storage system to an


N5600 storage system.

40 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


N5600 A20
The N5600 Model A20 is designed to provide identical function as the Model A10,
but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover (CFO)
software feature. The N5600 Model A20 consists of two processing nodes that are
designed to provide takeover and failback function, helping improve overall
availability. For the Model A20, each processing node is a 3U rack-mountable filer.
Therefore, the Model A20 occupies a total of 6U of rack space.

The N5600 Model A20 includes:


v Four 1.8 GHz 64-bit processors
v 16 GB of DDR-400 ECC memory
v 1 GB (512 MB per node) of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)
v Eight integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports
v Eight integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or
initiators
v Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans
v Redundant cooling fans
v Six PCI-Express (PCIe) expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus
Adapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs)
v Two integrated Remote LAN Management (RLM) ports
v Two serial console ports
v Front LCD message display

For the N5600 Model A20, the maximum number of all additional PCIe adapters is
six.

Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N5600 storage system are described in
Appendix G, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600
systems,” on page 157.

The Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of ten dual-path Fibre Channel
loops (20 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports) via the addition of six optional Fibre Channel
HBA for Disk Attachments (feature number 1014).

The Model A20 can be upgraded to a maximum of 32 Gigabit Ethernet ports via the
addition of six optional quad-port copper gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number
1022 or 1023).

The physical proximity of the two processing nodes within a Model A20 (with
respect to each other) is determined by which Infiniband cluster interconnect cables
are ordered (feature numbers 1037, 1038, 1039, 1040 and 1041). Optical cables
(feature numbers 1040 and 1041) also require feature number 1042.

Connecting expansion units to the N5600 filer


Both N5600 filer models require the addition of at least one storage expansion unit,
either an EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000.

Within a single EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000 expansion unit, all disk drives
must be of a particular type (rotational speed/capacity). Although the original order
for expansion units may contain expansion units with no more than two different
types (rotational speed/capacity) of disk drives, later upgrades to add additional
expansion units do not have to meet this requirement.

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 41


The maximum physical storage capacity of the N5600 system varies depending on
the type of disk storage expansion unit (SATA or Fibre Channel) and the capacity of
disk drives used. The following tables describes the maximum supported total
physical storage capacity for the N5600.
Table 25. N5600 raw storage capacity (without redundant cabling)
Maximum Maximum
Disk drive storage Maximum disk physical
Disk enclosure capacity enclosures drives capacity
EXN1000 250-GB SATA disk 36 504 126 TB
drives
EXN1000 500-GB SATA disk 36 504 252 TB
drives
EXN1000 750-GB SATA disk 36 504 378 TB
drives
EXN1000 1 TB SATA disk 36 504 504 TB
drives
EXN2000 144-GB Fibre 36 504 72.57 TB
Channel disk
drives
EXN2000 300-GB Fibre 36 504 151.2 TB
Channel disk
drives
EXN4000 144-GB Fibre 36 504 72.57 TB
Channel disk
drives
EXN4000 300-GB Fibre 36 504 151.2 TB
Channel disk
drives

Table 26. N5600 raw storage capacity (with redundant cabling)


Maximum Maximum
Disk drive storage Maximum disk physical
Disk enclosure capacity enclosures drives capacity
EXN1000 250-GB SATA disk 24 336 84 TB
drives
EXN1000 500-GB SATA disk 24 336 168 TB
drives
EXN1000 750-GB SATA disk 24 336 252 TB
drives
EXN1000 1 TB SATA disk 24 336 336 TB
drives
EXN2000 144-GB Fibre 24 336 48.38 TB
Channel disk
drives
EXN2000 300-GB Fibre 24 336 100.8 TB
Channel disk
drives
EXN4000 144-GB Fibre 24 336 48.38 TB
Channel disk
drives

42 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Table 26. N5600 raw storage capacity (with redundant cabling) (continued)
Maximum Maximum
Disk drive storage Maximum disk physical
Disk enclosure capacity enclosures drives capacity
EXN4000 300-GB Fibre 24 336 100.8 TB
Channel disk
drives

EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units and EXN2000/EXN4000 Fibre Channel


storage expansion units must not share Fibre Channel loops. A maximum of six
storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) are supported on a
single Fibre Channel loop.

Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for the N5600 filer. Dual-path Fibre
Channel cabling is designed to improve reliability, availability and serviceability of
the expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating two redundant
paths from each storage controller to each loop of the expansion units. For more
information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see the Installation and
Setup Instructions that came with your system.

N5600 filer feature codes


Table 27. N5600 filer feature codes
Feature
Feature Code Description Machine Model Code
Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet 2868 A10, A20 1012
adapter (optical)
Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet 2868 A10, A20 1013
adapter (copper)
Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2868 A10, A20 1014
HBA for disk attachment
Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2868 A10, A20 1015
HBA for tape attachment
Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2868 A10, A20 1017
target HBA
Dual-port GbE iSCSI adapter 2868 A10, A20 1021
(optical)
Quad-port GbE Ethernet TOE 2868 A10, A20 1022
adapter (copper)
Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter 2868 A10, A20 1023
(copper)
Dual-port SCSI Ultra320 HBA for 2869 A10, A20 1024
tape attachment
Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI 2868 A10, A20 1026
Target Adapter (copper)
Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2868 A10, A20 1029
HBA for disk attachment
Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet 2868 A10, A20 1031
adapter
Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA 2868 A20 1032
(A20/G20 models only)

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 43


Table 27. N5600 filer feature codes (continued)
Feature
Feature Code Description Machine Model Code
SnapMirror over Fibre Channel 2868 A10, A20 1033
HBA
Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2868 A10, A20 1035
HBA for tape and disk
attachment
2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2868 A20 1037
5m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2868 A20 1038
10m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2868 A20 1039
5m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2868 A20 1040
30m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2868 A20 1041
Copper-Fiber Converter 2868 A20 1042

Table 28. N5600 filer installation feature codes


Description Machine Model Feature
Field install rack mount kit 2868 A10, A20 9202

The power cord features for the N5600 filer are listed in Appendix B, “Power cord
list for N series storage systems,” on page 123.

N5600 gateway hardware features


The IBM System Storage N5600 gateways consist of the Model G10 and Model
G20, and associated software.

The N5600 Model G10 is designed to provide a single node gateway with NFS,
CIFS, FCP and iSCSI support in a 3U gateway mounted in a standard 19-inch rack.
The N5600 Model G20 provides an active/active dual-node base unit.

The N5600 gateways are designed to interoperate with products capable of data
transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These
include the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z
(NFS only) servers. The most current information on N5600 gateway interoperability
is available at:

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI,
see “Configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI” on page 63.

For more information about planning for your N series gateway system, refer to the
IBM System Storage N series Gateway Planning Guide for your version of Data
ONTAP.

N5600 Model G10


The N5600 Model G10 gateway does not include storage in the base chassis. The
base chassis includes:
v Two AMD 1.8 GHz 64-bit Opteron processors, each with 1 MB of level 2 cache

44 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


v 8 GB of DDR-400 memory
v Up to five backend Fibre Channel loops per node
v 512 MB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)
v 504 logical unit numbers (LUNs) support for both Model G10 and Model G20
v Four integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports (ten with the addition of expansion
HBA features)
v Four integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or
initiators
v Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans
v Redundant cooling fans
v Three PCI-Express (PCIe) expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus
Adapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs)
v Front LCD message display

All the adapter card slots of the N5600 are PCI-Express (PCIe) slots. For the
N5600 Model G10, the maximum number of all additional PCIe adapters is three.

Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N5300 and N5600 storage systems are
described in Appendix G, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and
N5600 systems,” on page 157.

The Model G10 may be upgraded to a Model G20. The upgrade from a Model G10
to a Model G20 is a disruptive upgrade.

N5600 Model G20


The N5600 Model G20 is designed to provide identical function as the N5600 Model
G10, but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover
(CFO) software feature. The Model G20 consists of two processing nodes that are
designed to provide failover and failback function, helping improve overall
availability. For the Model G20, each processing node is a 3U rack-mountable
gateway. Therefore, the Model G20 occupies a total of 6U of rack space.

The N5600 Model G20 includes:


v Four AMD 1.8 GHz 64-bit Opteron processors, each with 1 MB of level 2 cache
v 16 GB of DDR-400 memory
v Up to ten backend Fibre Channel loops
v 1 GB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)
v 504 logical unit numbers (LUNs) support for both Model G10 and Model G20
v Eight integrated 10/100/1000 Ethernet ports (20 with the addition of expansion
HBA features)
v Eight integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports that can be configured as targets or
initiators
v Redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies with fans
v Redundant cooling fans
v Six PCI-Express (PCIe) expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel Host Bus
Adapters (HBAs) or Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs), three per
node (always ordered and installed in pairs)
v Infiniband (IB) cluster cable, which attaches to the NVRAM6 adapter, between
the two processing N5000 nodes
v Front LCD message display

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 45


All the adapter card slots of the N5600 are PCI-Express (PCIe) slots. The maximum
number of adapters that may be added to the Model G20 is six. When adapter
cards are ordered for Model G20 on the initial order, they must be ordered and
added in pairs, one per node, so that both nodes are populated with the same
number of each type of PCIe adapters.

Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N5300 and N5600 storage systems are
described in Appendix G, “Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and
N5600 systems,” on page 157.

The physical proximity of the two processing nodes within a Model G20 (with
respect to each other) is determined by which Infiniband cluster interconnect cables
are ordered (feature numbers 1037, 1038, 1039, 1040 and 1041). Optical cables
(feature numbers 1040 and 1041) also require feature number 1042.

Connecting a gateway to external storage


You must use fiber optic cables to connect a gateway to external storage on a Fibre
Channel SAN.

See the Interoperability Matrix at the following Web site for supported devices for
your N5000 series gateway system.

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

Refer to the documentation for your external storage for additional information.

N5600 gateway feature codes


Table 29. N5600 gateway feature codes
Description Machine Model Feature
Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) 2868 G10, G20 1012
adapter (optical)
Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet 2868 G10, G20 1013
adapter (copper)
Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2868 G10, G20 1014
HBA - Disk
Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2868 G10, G20 1015
HBA - Tape
Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2868 G10, G20 1017
HBA - Target
Dual-port GbE iSCSI adapter 2868 G10, G20 1021
(optical)
Quad-port GbE Ethernet TOE 2868 G10, G20 1022
adapter (copper)
Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter 2868 G10, G20 1023
(copper)
Dual-port SCSI Ultra320 HBA for 2868 G10, G20 1024
tape attachment
Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI 2868 G10, G20 1026
Target Adapter (copper)
Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter 2868 G10, G20 1031
Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA 2868 G20 1032

46 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Table 29. N5600 gateway feature codes (continued)
Description Machine Model Feature
SnapMirror over Fibre Channel 2868 G10, G20 1033
HBA
2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2868 G20 1037
5m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2868 G20 1038
10m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2868 G20 1039
5m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2868 G20 1040
30m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2868 G20 1041
Copper-Fiber Converter 2868 G20 1042
4-Gbps Extended Long-wave SFP 2864 G20 1050

Table 30. N5600 gateway installation features codes


Description Machine Model Feature
Field install rack mount kit 2868 G10, G20 9202

The power cord features for the N5600 gateway are listed in Appendix B, “Power
cord list for N series storage systems,” on page 123.

N7700 filer hardware features


The N7700 filer storage controllers consist of the Model A11 and Model A21 and
associated software.

The IBM System Storage N7700 storage controllers are designed to interoperate
with products capable of data transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS,
FCP and NFS protocols. These include the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS
only), System x, and System z (NFS only) servers.

See the Interoperability Matrix at the following Web site for supported devices for
your N7000 series filer system.

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI,
see “Configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI” on page 63.

N7700 A11
The N7700 Model A11 is designed to provide a single-node storage controller with
iSCSI support, and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support via optional features. The N7700
is a 6U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The
N7700 storage controller does not include storage in the base chassis. The base
chassis includes:
v Two AMD 2.6 GHz 64-bit Opteron 252 processors, each with 1 MB of level 2
cache
v 16 GB of DDR-333 memory
v 512 MB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)
v Six integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports
v Eight integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 47


v Dual redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies and cooling fans
v Three PCI-X expansion slots
v Six PCIe expansion slots (Five PCIe slots are available for customer use. One
PCIe slot is reserved for the NVRAM6 adapter.)
v One serial console port

For the N7700 Model A11, the maximum number of additional expansion adapters
is eight (three PCI-X and five PCIe). One PCIe expansion slot is used for the
standard (included with the N7700) 512 MB NVRAM adapter card.

Note: The PCIe and PCI-X adapters supported by the N7700 and N7900 storage
systems are described in Appendix H, “Optional adapter cards supported by
N7000 series systems,” on page 163.

The N7700 Model A11 can be upgraded to a maximum of 14 dual-path (loop A and
loop B) Fibre Channel loops (28 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports) via the addition of
four optional Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (feature numbers 1014,
1029, or 1035). The 14 loops will support a maximum of 840 total disk drives. The
Model A11 can be upgraded to a maximum of 14 Gigabit Ethernet ports via the
addition of two optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface cards
(NICs) (feature number 1009).

The Model A11 may be upgraded to a Model A21. The upgrade from a Model A11
to a Model A21 is a disruptive upgrade.

N7700 A21
The N7700 Model A21 is designed to provide identical function as the N7700 Model
A11, but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover
(CFO) licensed function. The N7700 Model A21 supports a maximum of 840 drives,
32 GB of DDR-333 memory, and ten backend Fibre Channel loops. The Model A21
consists of two nodes that are designed to provide failover and failback function,
helping improve overall availability. For the Model A21, each node is a 6U
rack-mountable storage controller. Therefore, the Model A21 occupies a total of 12U
of rack space.

The Model A21 includes:


v Four AMD 2.6 GHz 64-bit Opteron 252 processors, each with 1 MB of level 2
cache
v 32 GB of DDR-333 memory
v 1 GB of NVRAM
v 12 integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports
v 16 integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports
v Dual redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies and cooling fans
v Six PCI-X expansion slots
v 12 PCIe expansion slots (Ten PCIe slots are available for customer use. Two
PCIe slots are reserved for NVRAM6 adapters.)
v Two serial console ports

For the N7700 Model A21, the maximum number of additional expansion adapters
is 16 (six PCI-X and 10 PCIe). Two PCIe expansion slots are used for the standard
(included with the N7700) 512 MB NVRAM adapter cards.

48 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Note: The PCIe and PCI-X adapters supported by the N7700 and N7900 storage
systems are described in Appendix H, “Optional adapter cards supported by
N7000 series systems,” on page 163.

The N7700 Model A21 can be upgraded to a maximum of 14 dual-path (loop A and
loop B) Fibre Channel loops (28 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports) via the addition of two
optional Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (feature number 1014, 1029, or
1035).

The Model A21 can be upgraded to a maximum of 20 Gigabit Ethernet ports via the
addition of four optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet NICs (feature number
1009).

The physical proximity of the two processing nodes within a Model A21 (with
respect to each other) is determined by which Infiniband cluster interconnect cables
are ordered (feature numbers 1037, 1038, 1039, 1040 and 1041). Optical cables
(feature numbers 1040 and 1041) also require feature number 1042.

Connecting expansion units to the N7700 filer


Both N7700 filer models require the addition of at least one storage expansion unit,
either an EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000.

Within a single EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000 expansion unit, all disk drives
must be of a particular type (rotational speed/capacity). Although the original order
for expansion units may contain expansion units with no more than two different
types (rotational speed/capacity) of disk drives, later upgrades to add additional
expansion units do not have to meet this requirement.

The maximum raw storage capacity of the N7700 system is determined only by the
number of disk drives supported.

Table 31 describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for the
N7700.
Table 31. N7700 raw storage capacity
Maximum Maximum
Disk drive storage Maximum disk physical
Disk enclosure capacity enclosures drives capacity
EXN1000 250-GB SATA disk 84 840 210 TB
drives
EXN1000 500-GB SATA disk 84 840 420 TB
drives
EXN1000 750-GB SATA disk 84 840 630 TB
drives
EXN1000 1 TB SATA disk 84 840 840 TB
drives1
EXN2000 72-GB Fibre 84 840 60.48 TB
Channel disk
drives
EXN2000 144-GB Fibre 84 840 120.96 TB
Channel disk
drives

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 49


Table 31. N7700 raw storage capacity (continued)
Maximum Maximum
Disk drive storage Maximum disk physical
Disk enclosure capacity enclosures drives capacity
EXN2000 300-GB Fibre 84 840 252 TB
Channel disk
drives
EXN4000 144-GB Fibre 84 840 120.96 TB
Channel disk
drives
EXN4000 300-GB Fibre 84 840 252 TB
Channel disk
drives
1
The 1 TB SATA disk drive requires Data ONTAP 7.2.4 or later.

EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units and EXN2000/EXN4000 Fibre Channel


storage expansion units must not share Fibre Channel loops. A maximum of six
storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) is supported on a
single Fibre Channel loop.

Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for the N7700 filer. Dual-path Fibre
Channel cabling is designed to improve reliability, availability and serviceability of
the expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating two redundant
paths from each storage controller to each loop of the expansion units. For more
information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see the Installation and
Setup Instructions that came with your system.

N7700 filer feature codes


Table 32. N7700 filer feature codes
Description Machine Model Feature
Single-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10 2866 A11, A21 1008
GbE) TOE (optical)
Quad-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) 2866 A11, A21 1009
TOE (copper)
Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) 2866 A11, A21 1010
iSCSI Target adapter (copper)
Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) 2866 A11, A21 1011
iSCSI Target adapter (optical)
Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter 2866 A11, A21 1012
(optical)
Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet 2866 A11, A21 1013
adapter (copper)
Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2866 A11, A21 1014
HBA for disk attachment
Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2866 A11, A21 1015
HBA for tape attachment
SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel Tape 2866 A11, A21 1016
adapter
Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2866 A11, A21 1017
Target HBA

50 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Table 32. N7700 filer feature codes (continued)
Description Machine Model Feature
Dual-port GbE iSCSI adapter 2866 A11, A21 1021
(optical)
Quad-port GbE Ethernet TOE 2866 A11, A21 1022
adapter (copper)
Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter 2866 A11, A21 1023
(copper)
Dual-port SCSI Ultra320 HBA for 2866 A11, A21 1024
tape attachment
Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI 2866 A11, A21 1026
Target Adapter (copper)
Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2866 A11, A21 1029
HBA for disk attachment
Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter 2866 A11, A21 1031
Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA 2866 A21 1032
SnapMirror over Fibre Channel 2866 A11, A21 1033
HBA (PCIe)
SnapMirror over Fibre Channel 2866 A11, A21 1034
HBA (PCI-X)
Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2866 A11, A21 1035
HBA for tape and disk attachment
2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2866 A21 1037
5m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2866 A21 1038
10m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2866 A21 1039
5m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2866 A21 1040
30m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2866 A21 1041
Copper-fiber converter 2866 A21 1042
5m 50-micron MMF cable 2866 A21 1045
30m 50-micron MMF cable 2866 A21 1046
30m 50-micron MMF cable 2866 A21 1047
(LC/SC)1
5m 50-micron MMF cable (LC/SC)1 2866 A21 1048
4-Gbps extended longwave SFP 2866 A21 1050
1
For use with feature codes 1008 or 1031.

Table 33. N7700 filer installation feature codes


Description Machine Model Feature
Plant install in 2101 rack 2866 A11, A21 9201
Field install rack mount kit 2866 A11, A21 9202

The power cord features for the N7700 filer are listed in Appendix B, “Power cord
list for N series storage systems,” on page 123.

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 51


N7700 gateway hardware features
The IBM System Storage N7700 gateways consist of the Model G11 or Model G21,
and associated software. Both N7700 gateway models require an existing external
storage infrastructure that can be heterogeneous. EXN expansion units may not be
attached to the N7700 gateways.

The N7700 gateways are designed to interoperate with products capable of data
transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These
include the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z
(NFS only) servers. The most current information on N7700 gateway interoperability
is available at:

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI,
see “Configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI” on page 63.

For more information about planning for your N series gateway system, refer to the
IBM System Storage N series Gateway Planning Guide for your version of Data
ONTAP.

N7700 Model G11


The N7700 G11 is a 6U gateway that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack.
The gateway does not include storage in the base chassis. The base chassis
includes:
v Two AMD 2.6 GHz 64-bit Opteron 252 processors, each with 1 MB of level 2
cache
v 16 GB of DDR-333 memory
v 512 MB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)
v Six integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports
v Eight integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports
v Dual redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies and cooling fans
v Three PCI-X expansion slots
v Six PCIe expansion slots (Five PCIe slots are available for customer use. One
PCIe slot is reserved for the NVRAM6 adapter.)

Note: The PCI adapters supported by the N7700 gateway are described in
Appendix H, “Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems,”
on page 163.
v One serial console port
v Support for a maximum of 840 LUNs

The Model G11 may be upgraded to a Model G21. The upgrade from a Model G11
to a Model G21 is a disruptive upgrade.

N7700 Model G21


The N7700 Model G21 is designed to provide identical function as the N7700 Model
G11, but with the addition of the Clustered Failover (CFO) function. The N7700
Model G21 consists of two active/active processing nodes that are designed to
provide a high-availability environment, helping improve overall reliability. For the

52 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Model G21, each processing node is a 6U rack-mountable gateway. Therefore, the
Model G21 occupies a total of 12U of rack space.

The base chassis includes:


v Four AMD 2.6 GHz 64-bit Opteron 252 processors, each with 1 MB of level 2
cache
v 32 GB of DDR-333 memory
v 1 GB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)
v Twelve integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports
v Sixteen integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports (32 with the addition of expansion
HBA adapters)
v Dual redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies and cooling fans
v Six PCI-X expansion slots (thee per node)
v Twelve PCIe expansion slots (six per node). On each node, five PCIe slots are
available for customer use and one PCIe slot is reserved for the NVRAM6
adapter.

Note: The adapters supported by the N7700 gateway are described in


Appendix H, “Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems,”
on page 163.
v Infiniband (IB) cluster cable, which attaches to the NVRAM6 adapters and
connects the two processing nodes
v Two serial console ports
v Support for a maximum of 840 LUNs
When adapter cards are ordered for the Model G21, they must be ordered and
added in pairs, one per node, so that both nodes are populated with the same
number of each type of PCI-X/PCIe adapters.

The physical proximity of the two processing nodes within a Model G21 (with
respect to each other) is determined by which Infiniband cluster interconnect cables
are ordered (feature numbers 1037, 1038, 1039, 1040 and 1041). Optical cables
(feature numbers 1040 and 1041) also require feature number 1042.

Connecting a gateway to external storage


You must use fiber optic cables to connect a gateway to external storage on a Fibre
Channel SAN.

See the Interoperability Matrix at the following Web site for supported devices for
your N7000 series gateway system.

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

Refer to the documentation for your external storage for additional information.

N7700 gateway feature codes


Table 34. N7700 gateway feature codes
Description Machine Model Feature
Single-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10 2866 G11, G21 1008
GbE) TOE (optical)

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 53


Table 34. N7700 gateway feature codes (continued)
Description Machine Model Feature
Quad-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) 2866 G11, G21 1009
TOE (copper)
Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) 2866 G11, G21 1010
iSCSI Target adapter (copper)
Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) 2866 G11, G21 1011
iSCSI Target adapter (optical)
Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter 2866 G11, G21 1012
(optical)
Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet 2866 G11, G21 1013
adapter (copper)
Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2866 G11, G21 1014
HBA for disk attachment
Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2866 G11, G21 1015
HBA for tape attachment
SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel Tape 2866 G11, G21 1016
adapter
Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2866 G11, G21 1017
Target HBA
Dual-port GbE iSCSI adapter 2866 G11, G21 1021
(optical)
Quad-port GbE Ethernet TOE 2866 G11, G21 1022
adapter (copper)
Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter 2866 G11, G21 1023
(copper)
Dual-port SCSI Ultra320 HBA for 2866 G11, G21 1024
tape attachment
Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI 2866 G11, G21 1026
Target Adapter (copper)
Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2866 G11, G21 1029
HBA for disk attachment
Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter 2866 G11, G21 1031
Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA 2866 G21 1032
SnapMirror over Fibre Channel 2866 G11, G21 1033
HBA PCIe
SnapMirror over Fibre Channel 2866 G11, G21 1034
HBA (PCI-X)
Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2866 G11, G21 1035
HBA for tape and disk attachment
2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2866 G21 1037
5m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2866 G21 1038
10m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2866 G21 1039
5m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2866 G21 1040
30m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2866 G21 1041
Copper-Fiber Converter 2866 G21 1042
5m 50-micron MMF cable 2866 G21 1045

54 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Table 34. N7700 gateway feature codes (continued)
Description Machine Model Feature
30m 50-micron MMF cable 2866 G21 1046
30m 50-micron MMF cable 2866 G21 1047
(LC/SC)1
5m 50-micron MMF cable (LC/SC)1 2866 G21 1048
4-Gbps extended longwave SFP 2866 G21 1050
1
For use with feature codes 1008 or 1031.

Table 35. N7700 gateway installation feature codes


Description Machine Model Feature
Plant install in 2101 rack 2866 G11, G21 9201
Field install rack mount kit 2866 G11, G21 9202

The power cord features for the N7700 gateway are listed in Appendix B, “Power
cord list for N series storage systems,” on page 123.

N7900 filer hardware features


The N7900 filer storage controllers consist of the Model A11 and Model A21 and
associated software. The IBM System Storage N7900 storage controllers are
designed to interoperate with products capable of data transmission in the
industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These include the IBM
Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x, and System z (NFS only)
servers.

See the Interoperability Matrix at the following Web site for supported devices for
your N7000 series filer system.

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI,
see “Configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI” on page 63.

N7900 A11
The N7900 Model A11 is designed to provide a single-node storage controller with
iSCSI support, and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support via optional features. The N7900
Model A11 is a 6U storage controller that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch
rack. The N7900 storage controller does not include storage in the base chassis.
The base chassis includes:
v Four AMD 2.6 GHz Opteron 885 64-bit dual-core processors, each with 1 MB of
level 2 cache
v 32 GB of DDR-333 memory
v 2 GB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)
v Six integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports
v Eight integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports
v Dual redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies and cooling fans
v Three PCI-X expansion slots

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 55


v Six PCIe expansion slots (Five PCIe slots are available for customer use. One
PCIe slot is reserved for the NVRAM6 adapter.)
v One serial console port

For the N7900 Model A11, the maximum number of additional expansion adapters
is eight (three PCI-X and five PCIe). One PCIe expansion slot is used for the
standard (included with the N7900) 2 GB NVRAM adapter card.

Note: The PCIe and PCI-X adapters supported by the N7700 and N7900 storage
systems are described in Appendix H, “Optional adapter cards supported by
N7000 series systems,” on page 163.

The N7900 Model A11 can be upgraded to a maximum of 14 multi-path (loop A and
loop B) Fibre Channel loops (28 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports) via the addition of
four optional Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (feature numbers 1014,
1029, or 1035). The 14 loops will support a maximum of 1176 total disk drives. The
Model A11 can be upgraded to a maximum of 14 Gigabit Ethernet ports via the
addition of two optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet Network Interface cards
(NICs) (feature number 1009).

The Model A11 may be upgraded to a Model A21. The upgrade from a Model A11
to a Model A21 is a disruptive upgrade.

N7900 A21
The N7900 Model A21 is designed to provide identical function as the N7900 Model
A11, but with the addition of a second processing node and the Clustered Failover
(CFO) licensed function. The N7900 Model A21 also supports a maximum of 1176
drives and 14 backend Fibre Channel loops.

The Model A21 consists of two nodes that are designed to provide failover and
failback function, helping improve overall availability. For the Model A21, each node
is a 6U rack-mountable storage controller. Therefore, the Model A21 occupies a
total of 12U of rack space.

The N7900 Model A21 includes:


v Eight AMD 2.6 GHz Opteron 885 64-bit dual-core processors, each with 1 MB of
level 2 cache
v 64 GB of DDR-333 memory
v 4 GB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)
v 12 integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports
v 16 integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports
v Dual redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies and cooling fans
v Six PCI-X expansion slots
v 12 PCIe expansion slots (Ten PCIe slots are available for customer use. Two
PCIe slots are reserved for NVRAM6 adapters.)
v Two serial console ports

For the N7900 Model A21, the maximum number of additional expansion adapters
is 16 (six PCI-X and 10 PCIe). Two PCIe expansion slots are used for the standard
(included with the N7900) 2 GB NVRAM adapter cards.

56 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Note: The PCIe and PCI-X adapters supported by the N7700 and N7900 storage
systems are described in Appendix H, “Optional adapter cards supported by
N7000 series systems,” on page 163.

The N7900 Model A21 can be upgraded to a maximum of 14 dual-path (loop A and
loop B) Fibre Channel loops (28 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports) via the addition of
four optional Fibre Channel HBAs for Disk Attachment (feature numbers 1014,
1029, or 1035). The Model A21 can be upgraded to a maximum of 20 Gigabit
Ethernet ports via the addition of four optional quad-port copper Gigabit Ethernet
NICs (feature number 1009).

The physical proximity of the two processing nodes within a Model A21 (with
respect to each other) is determined by which Infiniband cluster interconnect cables
are ordered (feature numbers 1037, 1038, 1039, 1040 and 1041). Optical cables
(feature numbers 1040 and 1041) also require feature number 1042.

Connecting expansion units to the N7900 filer


Both N7900 filer models require the addition of at least one storage expansion unit,
either an EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000.

Within a single EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000 expansion unit, all disk drives
must be of a particular type (rotational speed/capacity). Although the original order
for expansion units may contain expansion units with no more than two different
types (rotational speed/capacity) of disk drives, later upgrades to add additional
expansion units do not have to meet this requirement.

The maximum raw storage capacity of the N7900 system is determined only by the
number of disk drives supported.

Table 36 describes the maximum supported total physical storage capacity for the
N7900.
Table 36. N7900 raw storage capacity
Maximum Maximum
Disk drive storage Maximum disk physical
Disk enclosure capacity enclosures drives capacity
EXN1000 250-GB SATA disk 84 1176 294 TB
drives
EXN1000 500-GB SATA disk 84 1176 588 TB
drives
EXN1000 750-GB SATA disk 84 1176 882 TB
drives
EXN1000 1 TB SATA disk 84 1176 1176 TB
drives1
EXN2000 72-GB Fibre 84 1176 82.67 TB
Channel disk
drives
EXN2000 144-GB Fibre 84 1176 169.34 TB
Channel disk
drives
EXN2000 300-GB Fibre 84 1176 352.80 TB
Channel disk
drives

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 57


Table 36. N7900 raw storage capacity (continued)
Maximum Maximum
Disk drive storage Maximum disk physical
Disk enclosure capacity enclosures drives capacity
EXN4000 144-GB Fibre 84 1176 169.34 TB
Channel disk
drives
EXN4000 300-GB Fibre 84 1176 352.80 TB
Channel disk
drives
1
1 TB SATA disk drives require Data ONTAP 7.2.4 or later.

EXN1000 SATA storage expansion units and EXN2000/EXN4000 Fibre Channel


storage expansion units must not share Fibre Channel loops. A maximum of six
storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, or EXN4000) are supported on a
single Fibre Channel loop.

Dual-path Fibre Channel cabling is supported for the N7900 filer. Dual-path Fibre
Channel cabling is designed to improve reliability, availability and serviceability of
the expansion units attached to the storage controller by creating two redundant
paths from each storage controller to each loop of the expansion units. For more
information about using dual-path Fibre Channel cabling, see the Installation and
Setup Instructions that came with your system.

N7900 filer feature codes


Table 37. N7900 filer feature codes
Description Machine Model Feature
Single-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10 2867 A11, A21 1008
GbE) TOE (optical)
Quad-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) 2867 A11, A21 1009
TOE (copper)
Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) 2867 A11, A21 1010
iSCSI Target adapter (copper)
Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) 2867 A11, A21 1011
iSCSI Target adapter (optical)
Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter 2867 A11, A21 1012
(optical)
Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet 2867 A11, A21 1013
adapter (copper)
Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2867 A11, A21 1014
HBA for disk attachment
Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2867 A11, A21 1015
HBA for tape attachment
SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel Tape 2867 A11, A21 1016
adapter
Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2867 A11, A21 1017
Target HBA
Dual-port GbE iSCSI adapter 2867 A11, A21 1021
(optical)

58 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Table 37. N7900 filer feature codes (continued)
Description Machine Model Feature
Quad-port GbE Ethernet TOE 2867 A11, A21 1022
adapter (copper)
Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter 2867 A11, A21 1023
(copper)
Dual-port SCSI Ultra320 HBA for 2867 A11, A21 1024
tape attachment
Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI 2867 A11, A21 1026
Target Adapter (copper)
Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2867 A11, A21 1029
HBA for disk attachment
Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter 2867 A11, A21 1031
Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA 2867 A21 1032
SnapMirror over Fibre Channel 2867 A11, A21 1033
HBA (PCIe)
SnapMirror over Fibre Channel 2867 A11, A21 1034
HBA (PCI-X)
Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2867 A11, A21 1035
HBA for tape and disk attachment
2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2867 A21 1037
5m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2867 A21 1038
10m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2867 A21 1039
5m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2867 A21 1040
30m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2867 A21 1041
Copper-Fiber Converter 2867 A21 1042
5m 50-micron MMF cable 2867 A21 1045
30m 50-micron MMF cable 2867 A21 1046
30m 50-micron MMF cable 2867 A21 1047
(LC/SC)1
5m 50-micron MMF cable (LC/SC)1 2867 A21 1048
4-Gbps extended longwave SFP 2867 A21 1050
1
For use with feature codes 1008 or 1031.

Table 38. N7900 filer installation feature codes


Description Machine Model Feature
Plant install in 2101 rack 2867 A11, A21 9201
Field install rack mount kit 2867 A11, A21 9202

The power cord features for the N7900 filer are listed in Appendix B, “Power cord
list for N series storage systems,” on page 123.

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 59


N7900 gateway hardware features
The IBM System Storage N7900 gateways consist of the Model G11 or Model G21,
and associated software. Both N7900 gateway models require an existing external
storage infrastructure that can be heterogeneous. EXN expansion units may not be
attached to the N7900 gateways.

The N7900 gateways are designed to interoperate with products capable of data
transmission in the industry-standard iSCSI, CIFS, FCP and NFS protocols. These
include the IBM Eserver System p, System i (NFS only), System x and System z
(NFS only) servers. The most current information on N7900 gateway interoperability
is available at:

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

For details about your system's configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI,
see “Configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI” on page 63.

For more information about planning for your N series gateway system, refer to the
IBM System Storage N series Gateway Planning Guide for your version of Data
ONTAP.

N7900 Model G11


The N7900 Model G11 is designed to provide a single-node gateway with iSCSI
support, and NFS, CIFS, and FCP support via optional features. The N7900 is a 6U
gateway that must be mounted in a standard 19-inch rack. The N7900 gateway
does not include storage in the base chassis. The base chassis includes:
v Four AMD 2.6 GHz Opteron 885 64-bit dual-core processors, each with 1 MB of
level 2 cache
v 32 GB of DDR-333 memory
v 2 GB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)
v Six integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports
v Eight integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports (16 with the addition of expansion
HBA features)
v Dual redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies and cooling fans
v Three PCI-X expansion slots for additional Fibre Channel HBAs or Gigabit
Ethernet Network Interface Cards (NICs)
v Six PCIe expansion slots (Five PCIe slots are available for customer use. One
PCIe slot is reserved for the NVRAM6 adapter.)

Note: The PCI adapters supported by the N7900 gateway are described in
Appendix H, “Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems,”
on page 163.
v Support for a maximum of 1176 LUNs
v One serial console port

The N7900 Model G11 is capable of being upgraded to an N7900 Model G21. The
upgrade from a Model G11 to a Model G21 is a disruptive upgrade.

N7900 Model G21


The N7900 Model G21 is designed to provide identical function as the N7900 Model
G11, but with the addition of the Clustered Failover (CFO) function. The N7900

60 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Model G21 consists of two active/active processing nodes that are designed to
provide a high-availability environment, helping improve overall reliability. For the
Model G21, each processing node is a 6U rack-mountable gateway. Therefore, the
Model G21 occupies a total of 12U of rack space.

The base chassis includes:


v Eight AMD 2.6 GHz Opteron 885 64-bit dual-core processors, each with 1 MB of
level 2 cache
v 64 GB of DDR-333 memory
v 4 GB of non-volatile random access memory (NVRAM)
v Twelve integrated Gigabit Ethernet RJ-45 ports
v Sixteen integrated 4-Gbps Fibre Channel ports (32 with the addition of expansion
HBA adapters)
v Dual redundant hot-plug integrated power supplies and cooling fans
v Six PCI-X expansion slots (thee per node)
v Twelve PCIe expansion slots (six per node). On each node, five PCIe slots are
available for customer use and one PCIe slot is reserved for the NVRAM6
adapter.

Note: The PCIe adapters supported by the N7700 gateway are described in
Appendix H, “Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems,”
on page 163.
v Infiniband (IB) cluster cable, which attaches to the NVRAM6 adapters and
connects the two processing nodes
v Two serial console ports
v Support for a maximum of 1176 LUNs
When adapter cards are ordered for the Model G21, they must be ordered and
added in pairs, one per node, so that both nodes are populated with the same
number of each type of PCI-X/PCIe adapters.

The physical proximity of the two processing nodes within a Model G21 (with
respect to each other) is determined by which Infiniband cluster interconnect cables
are ordered (feature numbers 1037, 1038, 1039, 1040 and 1041). Optical cables
(feature numbers 1040 and 1041) also require feature number 1042.

Connecting a gateway to external storage


You must use fiber optic cables to connect a gateway to external storage on a Fibre
Channel SAN.

See the Interoperability Matrix at the following Web site for supported devices for
your N7000 series gateway system.

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

Refer to the documentation for your external storage for additional information.

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 61


N7900 gateway feature codes
Table 39. N7900 gateway feature codes
Description Machine Model Feature
Single-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10 2867 G11, G21 1008
GbE) TOE (optical)
Quad-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) 2867 G11, G21 1009
TOE (copper)
Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) 2867 G11, G21 1010
iSCSI Target adapter (copper)
Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) 2867 G11, G21 1011
iSCSI Target adapter (optical)
Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter 2867 G11, G21 1012
(optical)
Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet 2867 G11, G21 1013
adapter (copper)
Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2867 G11, G21 1014
HBA for disk attachment
Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2867 G11, G21 1015
HBA for tape attachment
SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel Tape 2867 G11, G21 1016
adapter
Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2867 G11, G21 1017
Target HBA
Dual-port GbE iSCSI adapter 2867 G11, G21 1021
(optical)
Quad-port GbE Ethernet TOE 2867 G11, G21 1022
adapter (copper)
Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter 2867 G11, G21 1023
(copper)
Dual-port SCSI Ultra320 HBA for 2867 G11, G21 1024
tape attachment
Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI 2867 G11, G21 1026
Target Adapter (copper)
Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2867 G11, G21 1029
HBA for disk attachment
Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter 2867 G11, G21 1031
Dual-port Metrocluster VI HBA 2867 G21 1032
SnapMirror over Fibre Channel 2867 G11, G21 1033
HBA (PCIe)
SnapMirror over Fibre Channel 2867 G11, G21 1034
HBA (PCI-X)
Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel 2867 G11, G21 1035
HBA for tape and disk attachment
2m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2867 G21 1037
5m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2867 G21 1038
10m Copper Cluster 4X IB cable 2867 G21 1039
5m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2867 G21 1040

62 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Table 39. N7900 gateway feature codes (continued)
Description Machine Model Feature
30m Fiber Cluster 4X IB cable 2867 G21 1041
Copper-Fiber Converter 2867 G21 1042
5m 50-micron MMF cable 2867 G21 1045
30m 50-micron MMF cable 2867 G21 1046
30m 50-micron MMF cable 2867 G21 1047
(LC/SC)1
5m 50-micron MMF cable (LC/SC)1 2867 G21 1048
4-Gbps extended longwave SFP 2867 G21 1050
1
For use with feature codes 1008 or 1031.

Table 40. N7900 gateway installation feature codes


Description Machine Model Feature
Plant install in 2101 rack 2867 G11, G21 9201
Field install rack mount kit 2867 G11, G21 9202

The power cord features for the N7900 gateway are listed in Appendix B, “Power
cord list for N series storage systems,” on page 123.

Configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI


The following sections describes the configuration limits for Fibre Channel and
iSCSI for all N series systems.
v “Host operating system configuration limits for iSCSI and Fibre Channel” on page
65
v “Configuration limits for single-controller N7000 series and N5000 series storage
systems” on page 65
v “Configuration limits for active/active N7000 series and N5000 series storage
systems” on page 66
v “Configuration limits for single-controller N3300 and N3600 systems” on page 67
v “Configuration limits for active/active N3300 and N3600 systems” on page 68
v “Configuration limits for single controller N3700 systems” on page 68
v “Configuration limits for active/active N3700 systems” on page 69

The following list provides parameters and definitions for Fibre Channel and iSCSI
configuration limits described in the following sections.
Visible target ports per host (iSCSI)
The maximum number of target iSCSI Ethernet ports a host can see or
access on iSCSI attached controllers.
Visible target ports per host (Fibre Channel)
The maximum number of Fibre Channel adapters a host can see or access
on the attached Fibre Channel controllers.
LUNs per host
The maximum number of LUNs that can be mapped from the controllers to
a single host.

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 63


Paths per LUN
The maximum number of accessible paths that a host has to a LUN.
Maximum LUN size
The maximum size of an individual LUN on the respective operating
system.
LUNs per controller
The maximum number of LUNs that can be configured per controller,
including cloned LUNs and LUNs contained within cloned volumes. LUNs
contained in Snapshot copies do not count in this limit and there is no limit
on the number of LUNs that can be contained within Snapshot copies.
LUNs per volume
The maximum number of LUNs that can be configured within a single
volume. LUNs contained in Snapshots do not count in this limit and there is
no limit on the number of LUNs that can be contained within Snapshot
copies.
Fibre Channel port fan-in
The maximum number of hosts that can connect to a single Fibre Channel
adapter on a controller. Connecting the maximum number of hosts is
generally not recommended and tuning the Fibre Channel queue depths on
the host is necessary to achieve this maximum value.
Fibre Channel port fan-out
The number of LUNs mapped to a host through a Fibre Channel target port
on a controller.
Hosts per controller (iSCSI)
The recommended maximum number of iSCSI hosts that can be connected
to a single controller. The general formula to calculate this is:
Maximum hosts = 8 * System Memory/ 512MB
Hosts per controller (Fibre Channel)
The maximum number of hosts that can connect to a controller. Connecting
the maximum number of hosts is generally not recommended and tuning
the Fibre Channel queue depths on the host is necessary to achieve this
maximum value.
igroups per controller
Maximum number of initiator groups that can be configured per controller.
Number of initiators per igroup
Maximum number of Fibre Channel initiators (HBA WWNs) or iSCSI
initiators (host iqn/eui nodenames) that can be included in a single igroup.
Number of LUN mappings per controller
Maximum number of LUN mappings per controller. For example, a LUN
mapped to two igroups counts as two mappings.
Length of LUN path name
The maximum number of characters in a full LUN name. For example,
/vol/abc/def has 12 characters.
LUN size
The maximum capacity of an individual LUN on a controller.
Fibre Channel queue depth available per port
The usable queue depth capacity of each Fibre Channel Target port.
Fibre Channel target ports per controller
The maximum number of supported Fibre Channel adapters per controller.

64 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Fibre Channel initiator adapters used for back-end disk connections (for
example, connections to disk shelves) are not included in this number.

Host operating system configuration limits for iSCSI and Fibre


Channel
Table 41 shows host-based configuration limits for Fibre Channel and iSCSI for their
respective host operating systems.

Note: The following configuration limits represent the maximum values that have
been tested. Do not use these limits as sizing guidelines.
Table 41. Host operating system configuration limits for iSCSI and Fibre Channel
Operating system
Parameter Windows Linux® HP-UX Solaris AIX® VMware
Visible target 16 16 16 16 16 16
ports per host
LUNs per host v 64 128 512 512 128 v 2.x=128
(Windows v 3.x=256
2000)
v 128
(Windows
2003)
Paths per LUN 8 4 8 more 16 16 v 2.x=4
possible, but
v 3.x=8
pvlinks will only
utilize 8
Max LUN size v 2 TB 2 TB 2 TB v 1023 GB v 1 TB 2 TB
Note: The
v 12 TB v 12 TB with v 12 TB with
maximum LUN
(Windows Solaris 9, AIX 5.2ML7
sizes are due
2003 or later VxVM, EFI, or later and
to restrictions
and AIX 5.3ML3
at the
appropriate or later
operating
patches
system level,
not the storage
system level.

Configuration limits for single-controller N7000 series and N5000


series storage systems
Table 42 on page 66 shows the storage system-based configuration limits for
individual system models. All values are for Fibre Channel and iSCSI unless noted.

Note: The following configuration limits represent the maximum values that have
been tested. Do not use these limits as sizing guidelines.

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 65


Table 42. Configuration limits for single-controller N7000 series and N5000 series storage
systems
Storage system
N5300 and
N5200 N5500 N5600 N7700 N7900
Parameter A10/G10 A10/G10 A10/G10 A11/G11 A11/G11
Maximum number of LUNs 1024 1024 2048 2048 2048
per controller
Maximum number of LUNs 1024 1024 2048 2048 2048
per volume
Maximum port fan-in 64 64 64 64 64
Maximum connected hosts 256 256 256 256 256
per storage controller (Fibre
Channel)
Maximum connected hosts 64 128 256 256 512
per controller (iSCSI)
Maximum number of 256 256 256 256 256
igroups per controller
Maximum number of 256 256 256 256 256
initiators per igroup
Maximum number of LUN 4096 4096 4096 8192 8192
mappings per controller
Maximum length of LUN 255 255 255 255 255
path name
Maximum LUN Size 12 TB 12 TB 12 TB 12 TB 12 TB
Maximum Fibre Channel 1720 1720 1720 1720 1720
Queue Depth available per
port
Maximum Fibre Channel 4 4 4 8 8
target ports per controller

Configuration limits for active/active N7000 series and N5000 series


storage systems
Table 43 shows the storage system-based configuration limits for individual system
models. All values are for Fibre Channel and iSCSI unless noted.

Note: The following configuration limits represent the maximum values that have
been tested. Do not use these limits as sizing guidelines.
Table 43. Configuration limits for active/active N7000 series and N5000 series storage
systems
Storage system
N5300 and
N5200 N5500 N5600 N7700 N7900
Parameter A20/G20 A20/G20 A20/G20 A21/G21 A21/G21
Maximum number of LUNs 1024 1024 2048 2048 2048
per controller
Maximum number of LUNs 1024 1024 2048 2048 2048
per volume

66 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Table 43. Configuration limits for active/active N7000 series and N5000 series storage
systems (continued)
Storage system
N5300 and
N5200 N5500 N5600 N7700 N7900
Parameter A20/G20 A20/G20 A20/G20 A21/G21 A21/G21
Maximum port fan-in 64 64 64 64 64
Maximum connected hosts 256 256 256 256 256
per active/active
configuration (Fibre
Channel)
Maximum connected hosts 128 256 512 512 1024
per active/active
configuration (iSCSI)
Maximum number of 256 256 256 256 256
igroups per active/active
configuration
Maximum number of 256 256 256 256 256
initiators per igroup
Maximum number of LUN 4096 4096 4096 8192 8192
mappings per active/active
configuration
Maximum length of LUN 255 255 255 255 255
path name
Maximum LUN Size 12 TB 12 TB 12 TB 12 TB 12 TB
Maximum Fibre Channel 1720 1720 1720 1720 1720
Queue Depth available per
port
Maximum Fibre Channel 8 8 8 16 16
target ports per active/active
configuration

Configuration limits for single-controller N3300 and N3600 systems


Table 44 shows the storage system-based configuration limits for individual system
models. All values are for Fibre Channel and iSCSI unless noted.

Note: The following configuration limits represent the maximum values that have
been tested. Do not use these limits as sizing guidelines.
Table 44. Configuration limits for single-controller N3300 and N3600 systems
Storage system
Parameter N3300 A10 N3600 A10
Maximum number of LUNs per controller 1024 1024
Maximum number of LUNs per volume 1024 1024
Maximum port fan-in 16 16
Maximum connected hosts per controller (Fibre 24 32
Channel)
Maximum connected hosts per controller (iSCSI) 24 32
Maximum number of igroups per controller 256 256

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 67


Table 44. Configuration limits for single-controller N3300 and N3600 systems (continued)
Storage system
Parameter N3300 A10 N3600 A10
Maximum number of initiators per igroup 256 256
Maximum number of LUN mappings per 4096 4096
controller
Maximum length of LUN path name 255 255
Maximum LUN Size 12 TB 12 TB
Maximum Fibre Channel Queue Depth available 737 737
per port
Maximum Fibre Channel target ports per 2 2
controller

Configuration limits for active/active N3300 and N3600 systems


Table 45 shows the storage system-based configuration limits for individual system
models. All values are for Fibre Channel and iSCSI unless noted.

Note: The following configuration limits represent the maximum values that have
been tested. Do not use these limits as sizing guidelines.
Table 45. Configuration limits for active/active N3300 and N3600 systems
Storage system
Parameter N3300 A20 N3600 A20
Maximum number of LUNs per active/active 1024 1024
storage system
Maximum number of LUNs per volume 1024 1024
Maximum port fan-in 16 16
Maximum connected hosts per active/active 24 32
configuration (Fibre Channel)
Maximum connected hosts per active/active 24 32
configuration (iSCSI)
Maximum number of igroups per active/active 256 256
configuration
Maximum number of initiators per igroup 256 256
Maximum number of LUN mappings per 4096 4096
active/active configuration
Maximum length of LUN path name 255 255
Maximum LUN Size 12 TB 12 TB
Maximum Fibre Channel Queue Depth available 737 737
per port
Maximum Fibre Channel target ports per 4 4
active/active configuration

Configuration limits for single controller N3700 systems


Table 46 on page 69 shows the storage system-based configuration limits for
individual system models. All values are for Fibre Channel and iSCSI unless noted.

68 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Note: The following configuration limits represent the maximum values that have
been tested. Do not use these limits as sizing guidelines.
Table 46. Configuration limits for single controller N3700 systems
Storage system
Parameter N3700 A10
Maximum number of LUNs per controller 1024
Maximum number of LUNs per volume 1024
Maximum port fan-in 16
Maximum connected hosts per controller (Fibre Channel) 16
Maximum connected hosts per controller (iSCSI) 8
Maximum number of igroups per controller 256
Maximum number of initiators per igroup 256
Maximum number of LUN mappings per controller 4096
Maximum length of LUN path name 255
Maximum LUN Size 6 TB
Maximum Fibre Channel Queue Depth available per port 491
Maximum Fibre Channel target ports per controller 1

Configuration limits for active/active N3700 systems


Table 47 shows the storage system-based configuration limits for individual system
models. All values are for Fibre Channel and iSCSI unless noted.

Note: The following configuration limits represent the maximum values that have
been tested. Do not use these limits as sizing guidelines.
Table 47. Configuration limits for active/active N3700 systems
Storage system
Parameter N3700 A20
Maximum number of LUNs per active/active storage system 1024
Maximum number of LUNs per volume 1024
Maximum port fan-in 16
Maximum connected hosts per active/active storage system 16
(Fibre Channel)
Maximum connected hosts per active/active storage system 32
(iSCSI)
Maximum number of igroups per active/active storage system 256
Maximum number of initiators per igroup 256
Maximum number of LUN mappings per controller 4096
Maximum length of LUN path name 255
Maximum LUN Size 6 TB
Maximum Fibre Channel Queue Depth available per port 491
Maximum Fibre Channel target ports per active/active storage 2
system

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 69


EXN1000 expansion unit hardware features
The IBM System Storage EXN1000 SATA expansion unit is a SATA disk storage
device for IBM System Storage N series filer storage systems. The EXN1000 3U
disk storage expansion unit may be mounted in any industry-standard 19-inch rack.

The EXN1000 contains:


v Dual redundant hot-pluggable integrated power supples and cooling fans
v Dual redundant disk expansion unit switched controllers
v Fourteen hard disk drive bays.

The EXN1000 SATA expansion unit is shipped with a minimum of five SATA disk
drives, up to a maximum of 14 disk drives (all of the same capacity), in 250-GB,
320-GB, 500-GB, 750-GB, or 1 TB physical capacities.
v With 250-GB SATA hard disk drives, each EXN1000 provides a maximum of 3.5
TB of physical storage capacity.
v With 320-GB SATA hard disk drives, each EXN1000 provides a maximum of 4.48
TB of physical storage capacity.
v With 500-GB SATA hard disk drives, each EXN1000 provides a maximum of 7
TB of physical storage capacity.
v With 750-GB SATA hard disk drives, each EXN1000 provides a maximum of 10.5
TB of physical storage capacity.
v With 1 TB SATA hard disk drives, each EXN1000 provides a maximum of 14 TB
of physical storage capacity.

Note: While the initial order must contain 14 drives, at least five of the drives must
be installed in the EXN1000 enclosure with drive blank covers (feature 4099)
covering the remaining drive bays.

Attention: 320-GB SATA hard disk drives are not supported for use in EXN1000s
when used in N7700 and N7900 filer configurations.

EXN1000 feature codes


Table 48 lists the feature codes for the EXN1000.
Table 48. EXN1000 feature codes
Description Machine Model Feature
SFP GBIC 2861 001 2010
Fibre Channel NAS to EXP Cable 2861 001 2020
0.5 m 1
Fibre Channel Copper Cable 0.5 m 2861 001 2021
Fibre Channel NAS to EXP Cable 2861 001 2022
3.0 m 1
Fibre Channel Copper Cable 3.0 m 2861 001 2023
1.0 m Fibre Channel Optical Cable 2861 001 2042
2.0 m Fibre Channel Optical Cable 2861 001 2043
5.0 m Fibre Channel Optical Cable 2861 001 2044
250-GB SATA Drive 2861 001 4010
2
320-GB SATA Drive 2861 001 4011
500-GB SATA Drive 2861 001 4012

70 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Table 48. EXN1000 feature codes (continued)
Description Machine Model Feature
750-GB SATA Drive 2861 001 4013
1-TB SATA Drive 2861 001 4016
HDD Blank Panel 2861 001 4099
1
Fibre Channel Copper NAS to EXP patch cables are supported only for direct connections
to expansion units from N3700 storage systems with early CPU module designs. For more
information, see “Understanding the differences between early and current N3700 CPU
modules” on page 14.
2
320-GB SATA hard disk drives are not supported for use in EXN1000s when used in
N7700 and N7900 filer configurations.

The power cord features for the EXN1000 are listed in Appendix B, “Power cord list
for N series storage systems,” on page 123.

EXN2000 expansion unit hardware features


The IBM System Storage EXN2000 Fibre Channel expansion unit is a Fibre
Channel disk storage device for the IBM System Storage N series filer storage
systems. Physical capacity can be scaled up to 4.2 TB for each EXN2000 added to
an N series filer (assuming the EXN2000 is populated with 14 300-GB HDDs).

The EXN2000 contains:


v Dual redundant hot-pluggable integrated power supplies and cooling fans
v Dual redundant disk expansion unit switched controllers
v Fourteen hard disk drive bays

The EXN2000 Fibre Channel expansion unit is shipped with a minimum of four
Fibre Channel disk drives, up to a maximum of 14 disk drives (all of the same
capacity). Disk drive options for the EXN2000 include 72 GB (10,000 or 15,000
rpm), 144 GB (10,000 or 15,000 rpm), and 300 GB (10,000 rpm).

Note: While the initial order must contain 14 drives, at least four of the drives must
be installed in the EXN2000 enclosure with drive blank covers (feature 4099)
covering the remaining drive bays.

EXN2000 feature codes


Table 49 lists the feature codes for the EXN2000.
Table 49. EXN2000 feature codes
Description Machine Model Feature
SFP GBIC 2863 001 2010
Fibre Channel NAS to EXP Cable 2863 001 20201
0.5 m
Fibre Channel Copper Cable 0.5 m 2863 001 2021
Fibre Channel NAS to EXP Cable 2863 001 20221
3.0 m
Fibre Channel Copper Cable 3.0 m 2863 001 2023
1.0 m Fibre Channel Optical Cable 2863 001 2042
2.0 m Fibre Channel Optical Cable 2863 001 2043

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 71


Table 49. EXN2000 feature codes (continued)
Description Machine Model Feature
5.0 m Fibre Channel Optical Cable 2863 001 2044
72 GB, 10K rpm Fibre Channel 2863 001 4000
HDD
72 GB, 15K rpm Fibre Channel 2863 001 4001
HDD
144 GB, 10K rpm Fibre Channel 2863 001 4002
HDD
144 GB, 15K rpm Fibre Channel 2863 001 4003
HDD
300 GB, 10K rpm Fibre Channel 2863 001 4004
HDD
HDD Blank Panel 2863 001 4099
1
Fibre Channel Copper NAS to EXP patch cables are supported only for direct connections
to expansion units from N3700 storage systems with early CPU module designs. For more
information, see “Understanding the differences between early and current N3700 CPU
modules” on page 14.

The power cord features for the EXN2000 are listed in Appendix B, “Power cord list
for N series storage systems,” on page 123.

EXN4000 expansion unit hardware features


The IBM System Storage EXN4000 Fibre Channel expansion unit is a Fibre
Channel disk storage device for the IBM System Storage N series filer storage
systems. Physical capacity can be scaled up to 4.2 TB for each EXN4000 added to
an N series filer (assuming the EXN4000 is populated with fourteen 300-GB HDDs).

The EXN4000 is designed to provide 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, and 4-Gbps Fibre Channel
disk expansion for the IBM System Storage N series storage controllers. EXN4000s
attached to a 2-Gbps loop must be manually configured for 2-Gbps speed.

Note: The EXN4000 4-Gbps support requires that the N series filer be running
Data ONTAP 7.2.1 or later.

The EXN4000 contains:


v Dual redundant hot-pluggable integrated power supplies and cooling fans
v Dual redundant disk expansion unit switched controllers
v Fourteen hard disk drive bays

The EXN4000 Fibre Channel expansion unit is shipped with a minimum of four
Fibre Channel disk drives, up to a maximum of 14 disk drives (all of the same
capacity). Disk drive options for the EXN4000 include 144 GB (10,000 or 15,000
rpm) and 300 GB (10,000 rpm or 15,000 rpm).

Note: While the initial order must contain 14 drives, at least four of the drives must
be installed in the EXN4000 enclosure with drive blank covers (feature 4099)
covering the remaining drive bays.

72 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


EXN4000 feature codes
Table 50 lists the feature codes for the EXN4000.
Table 50. EXN4000 feature codes
Description Machine Model Feature
4-Gbps SFP GBIC 2863 004 2011
Fibre Channel Copper Cable 0.5 m 2863 004 2021
Fibre Channel Copper Cable 3.0 m 2863 004 2023
1.0 m Fibre Channel Optical Cable 2863 004 2042
2.0 m Fibre Channel Optical Cable 2863 004 2043
5.0 m Fibre Channel Optical Cable 2863 004 2044
144 GB, 10K rpm Fibre Channel 2863 004 4002
HDD
144 GB, 15K rpm Fibre Channel 2863 004 4003
HDD
300 GB, 10K rpm Fibre Channel 2863 004 4004
HDD
300 GB 4-Gbps 15K RPM Fibre 2863 004 4006
Channel HDD
HDD Blank Panel 2863 004 4099

The power cord features for the EXN4000 are listed in Appendix B, “Power cord list
for N series storage systems,” on page 123.

Rack mount requirements


N series storage systems and expansion units should be rack-mounted. N series
storage systems and expansion units include a mounting rail kit. The recommended
racks are:
v IBM 7014 Model T00, which is a 36U high rack
v IBM 7014 Model T42, which is a 42U high rack
v IBM 2101 Model N00 rack, which is a 36U high rack

Other racks may be used, provided they allow the clearances specified in
Appendix D, “Specifications for IBM and non-IBM racks,” on page 133. N series
storage systems and expansion units do not mount in all IBM racks. It is important
to check clearances when using any rack other than the IBM 7014 or IBM 2101.

Chapter 2. IBM N series hardware features 73


74 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide
Chapter 3. IBM N series storage system software features
The operating system for the IBM NAS N series products is the NetApp Data
ONTAP software. It is a highly optimized, scalable and flexible operating system
that can handle heterogeneous environments. It integrates into UNIX, Windows, and
Web environments.

Data ONTAP characteristics include:


v Flexible volumes that do not require prepartitioning
v Usage of multiple processors for performance
v Block-level data access over Fibre Channel SAN fabric using FCP and over
IP-based Ethernet network using iSCSI
v File-level data access over an IP-based Ethernet network using file access
protocols such as NFS, CIFS, HTTP, or FTP
v Data protection and recovery
v Disk-based data permanence features for regulated and reference data
v Double parity RAID
v Setup wizard
v FilerView™, a web-based administration tool that allows IT administrators to fully
manage N series systems from remote locations. FilerView is a simple and
intuitive web-based single-appliance administration.
v SnapShot™, which enables instant self-service file backup and recovery for end
users. Only block level changes are stored, so only a minimal amount of space is
required for each subsequent snapshot.
v FlexVol™, which allows an administrator to create multiple flexible volumes across
a large pool of disks. This feature enables dynamic, non-disruptive storage (thin)
provisioning and increases space- and time-efficiency. FlexVol enables more
productive use of available storage and helps improve performance.

Following are descriptions of the supported software protocols for the N series
storage system.
CIFS CIFS allows Microsoft® Windows servers and clients access over the IP
network using CIFS file system protocols. Microsoft Windows client access
licenses (CALs) are not required.
CIFS supports an active directory environment.
To enable CIFS support, you must purchase the appropriate feature code.
See “IBM N series host software features” on page 83.
NFS NFS allows UNIX and Linux servers and clients access over an IP network
using NFS file system protocols.
To enable NFS support, you must purchase the appropriate feature code.
See “IBM N series host software features” on page 83.
iSCSI iSCSI allows transfer of data between storage and servers in block I/O
formats (iSCSI protocol) across an IP network. iSCSI enables the creation
of IP SANs for optimizing the transfer of database traffic in IP environments.
To enable iSCSI, you must purchase the appropriate feature code. See
“IBM N series host software features” on page 83.
FCP FCP allows transfer of data between storage and servers in block I/O

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2008 75


formats utilizing FCP protocols across a Fibre Channel SAN. FCP enables
participation of an N series storage solution within Fibre Channel SAN
environments.
To enable FCP, you must purchase the appropriate feature code. See “IBM
N series host software features” on page 83.

Following are descriptions of some of the Data ONTAP software packages available
for the N series storage system as feature codes.
Advanced Single Instance Storage
This feature provides block-level deduplication within the entire flexible
volume on an IBM N series storage controller that has the near-line
Function feature enabled. Advanced Single Instance Storage only stores
unique data blocks in the flexible volume and creates a small amount of
additional metadata in the process. Each block of data has a digital
″signature,″ that is compared to all other signatures in the flexible volume. If
an exact byte-for-byte block match exists on the flexible volume, the
duplicate block is discarded and its disk space is reclaimed.
CFO Installed on a pair of N series storage controllers, this feature is designed to
enable the transfer of data service from an unavailable controller to the
other controller in the cluster. It is designed to deliver a robust and highly
available data service for business-critical environments.
Disk Sanitization
Disk sanitization is the process of physically obliterating data by overwriting
disks with specified byte patterns or random data in a manner that helps
prevent recovery of current data by any known recovery methods. This
feature enables you to carry out disk sanitization by using three successive
byte-overwrite patterns per cycle and a default six cycles per operation.
Notes:
1. Disk sanitization is supported for N series filers only. Disk sanitization is
not supported for gateway models.
2. After the disk sanitization feature has been installed on an N series
storage system, it cannot be uninstalled.
FlexClone™
FlexClone enables near-instant replication of data volumes/sets without
requiring additional storage space at the time of creation. FlexClone allows
an IT administrator to make a backup copy of a database and then modify
and run testing against the test (backup) database without affecting the
online database and without taking the online database offline.
iSCSI Protocol
This feature enables the iSCSI Protocol licensed function, which is
designed to provide connectivity to clients that transfer data via the iSCSI
protocol.
LockVault™ Compliance
LockVault Compliance provides records retention rules and management of
unstructured data. LockVault enables IT administrators to “lock” a Snapshot
copy in a non-erasable and non-rewriteable format for compliant retention.
Nightly Snapshot backups save only changed blocks; full backup images
are preserved.
The ComplianceJournal™ tool keeps a log of changes between Snapshot
copies.

76 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Note: LockVault Compliance is a combination of the Snaplock™
Compliance and SnapVault™ Secondary software features.
LockVault Enterprise
Like LockVault Compliance, LockVault Enterprise provides records retention
rules and management of unstructured data. LockVault enables IT
administrators to “lock” a Snapshot copy in a non-erasable and
non-rewriteable format for compliant retention. Nightly Snapshot backups
save only changed blocks; full backup images are preserved. LockVault
Enterprise is designed to allow administrators to delete LockVault Enterprise
volumes.
The ComplianceJournal tool logs changes between Snapshot copies.

Note: LockVault Enterprise is a combination of the Snaplock Enterprise and


SnapVault Secondary software features.
MetroCluster
This feature is an integrated, high-availability, and business-continuance
solution designed to leverage proven technologies from IBM. It expands the
capabilities of the IBM N series portfolio of high-availability and disaster
recovery solutions–a portfolio that includes failover, data replication, and
backup solutions. MetroCluster is designed to be a simple-to-administer
solution that extends failover capability from within a data center to a
remote site. It also provides replication of data at the primary site to a
remote site, helping to keep data at the remote site current. The
combination of failover and data replication aids in the recovery from
disaster, helping prevent loss of data in less time than otherwise possible.
Microsoft Exchange Bundle
This Microsoft Exchange Bundle feature is designed to provide support for
a specified number of Single Mailbox Recovery users.
MultiStore®
MultiStore permits consolidating a large number of Windows and UNIX file
servers onto a single storage system.
MultiStore is designed to let you quickly and easily create separate, private
logical partitions in filer network and storage resources. Each virtual storage
partition is designed to maintain separation from every other storage
partition to prevent different enterprise departments that share the same
storage resources from accessing or finding other partitions. MultiStore
helps prevent information on any virtual partition from being viewed, used,
or downloaded by an unauthorized users.
NearStore
This feature is designed to help optimize an N series system for data
protection and retention applications. It enables additional concurrent
streams and SnapVault for NetBackup.
SnapLock Compliance
SnapLock Compliance provides data permanence storage that enables
compliance with government records retention regulations by using
SEC-compliant disk-based WORM technology.
SnapLock Enterprise
Like SnapLock Compliance, SnapLock Enterprise provides data
permanence storage that enables compliance with government records

Chapter 3. IBM N series storage system software features 77


retention regulations by using SEC-compliant disk-based WORM
technology. SnapLock Enterprise allows administrators to delete SnapLock
Enterprise volumes.
SnapManager for Exchange
SnapManager for Exchange is designed to help streamline storage
management while simplifying configuration, backup, and restore operations
for Microsoft Exchange databases.
SnapManager™ for SQL
SnapManager for SQL is designed to help reduce backup and restore times
of SQL databases by using backups based upon snapshot copies.
SnapManager for SQL enables simultaneous backup of multiple databases
using minimal disk space for each additional full backup.
SnapManager for SAP
SnapManager for SAP is designed to allow SAP administrators to backup
and restore a SAP system hosted on an Oracle database. It is integrated
with the interface for SAP br* tools for backup and recovery of SAP
systems as well as with the N series data management tools. It is designed
to simplify provisioning and data protection on enterprise SAP systems.
SnapManager for SharePoint
IBM SnapManager for Microsoft Office SharePoint provides a single console
to manage disk-based backup and recovery of SharePoint content
databases, portals, sites, sub-sites, folders, documents, and versions of
documents. Deployed in combination with an N series storage system,
SnapManager software is designed to provide near- instantaneous hot
backups and rapid restores to help you achieve a combination of
availability, scalability, performance, and reliability for SharePoint
environments. This feature allows connectivity of any number of Microsoft
Office SharePoint servers to one N series storage system.
SnapMirror®
SnapMirror provides remote mirroring software that enables automated file
system replication between sites. SnapMirror enables asynchronous,
synchronous, and semi-synchronous remote replication over inexpensive
Internet protocols. Full backup is followed by incremental block updates.
SnapMirror/SnapVault Bundle
This feature is a bundle of the SnapMirror and SnapVault Secondary
features, designed to provide improved value for the combination. It is
typically used by customers wanting to provide a mirrored, remote site for
their data backup. This feature accomplishes that by having the SnapVault
function create an initial, local backup copy of the data, and then having the
SnapMirror function copy the data to a remote site. SnapVault Primary and
SnapManager are not included in this bundle.
SnapMover®
SnapMover provides a local data migration solution for optimizing workloads
across N series systems sharing a common disk array. SnapMover allows
you to migrate the ownership of a volume from one filer to another filer with
a single command. This feature also allows for better resource utilization
and performance amongst multiple N series systems.

Note: MultiStore and Clustering are prerequisites for SnapMover.


SnapRestore®
SnapRestore enables quick restoration of snapshot data files and volumes.
It provides instant self-service volume recovery for large individual files.

78 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


SnapRestore allows volumes to be restored with a single command (as
opposed to the file level restorations that SnapShot offers).
SnapValidator™
SnapValidator provides data validation and protection for Oracle data.
SnapVault Primary
SnapVault Primary provides disk-based backup by periodically backing up a
SnapShot copy to another system. SnapVault provides heterogeneous,
super-efficient, hourly disk-based online backup and restoration by
periodically backing up a snapshot copy to another system. SnapVault
Primary is the license for the primary backup system in use.
SnapVault Secondary
Like SnapVault Primary, SnapVault Secondary provides disk-based backup
by periodically backing up a SnapShot copy to another system. SnapVault
Secondary is required to attain the license for the secondary backup device.
SyncMirror®
SyncMirror provides data protection by maintaining two copies of data
online; SyncMirror maintains strict physical separation between the two
copies. This feature enables synchronous local mirroring from one volume
to another volume attached to the same filer. SyncMirror includes volume
mirroring between two clustered nodes.

Table 51 on page 80, Table 52 on page 81, and Table 53 on page 82 list the
supported software features for all N series models.

Chapter 3. IBM N series storage system software features 79


Table 51. N series software licensed function indicators (Models 2859 to 2863)

80
Description 2859 A10 2859 A20 2862 A10 2862 A20 2863 A10 2863 A20
Data ONTAP 6300 6350 7001 7101 7000 7100
CIFS 6302 6352 7002 7102 7002 7102
HTTP 6303 6353 7003 7103 7003 7103
NFS 6304 6354 7004 7104 7004 7104
CFO n/a 6355 n/a 7105 n/a 7105
FlexClone 6311 6361 7011 7111 7011 7111
MultiStore 6320 6370 7020 7120 7020 7120
NearStore 6322 6372 7022 7122 n/a n/a
iSCSI Protocol 6325 6375 7025 7125 7025 7125
SnapMirror/SnapVault Bundle 6329 6379 7029 7129 7029 7129
SnapMirror 6331 6381 7031 7131 7031 7131
SnapLock Compliance n/a n/a n/a n/a 7032 7132
SnapLock Enterprise n/a n/a n/a n/a 7033 7133
SnapMover n/a 6384 n/a 7134 n/a 7134
SnapRestore 6335 6385 7035 7135 7035 7135
SnapVault Primary 6336 6386 7036 7136 7036 7136

IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


SnapVault Secondary 6337 6387 7037 7137 7037 7137
LockVault Compliance n/a n/a n/a n/a 7040 7140
LockVault Enterprise n/a n/a n/a n/a 7041 7141
SnapValidator 6342 6392 7042 7142 7042 7142
Fibre Channel Protocol 6343 6393 7043 7143 7043 7143
Disk Sanitization 6344 6394 7044 7144 7044 7144
SnapManager for Exchange 6345 6395 7045 7145 7045 7145
SnapManager for SQL 6346 6396 7046 7146 7046 7146
Advanced Single Instance Storage 6347 6397 7047 7147 n/a n/a
Microsoft Exchange Bundle (2500 users) n/a n/a n/a 7178 n/a n/a
SnapManager for SharePoint 6349 6399 7049 7149 n/a n/a
Table 52. N series software licensed function indicators (Models 2864 to 2866)
Description 2864 A10 2864 A20 2864 G10 2864 G20 2865 A10 2865 A20 2865 G10 2865 G20 2866 A11 2866 A21 2866 G11 2866 G21
Data ONTAP 7200 7250 7300 7350 7400 7450 7500 7550 7600 7650 7700 7750
CIFS 7201 7251 7301 7351 7401 7451 7501 7551 7601 7651 7701 7751
HTTP 7202 7252 7302 7352 7402 7452 7502 7552 7602 7652 7702 7752
NFS 7203 7253 7303 7353 7403 7453 7503 7553 7603 7653 7703 7753
CFO n/a 7254 n/a 7354 n/a 7454 n/a 7554 n/a 7654 n/a 7754
FlexClone 7204 7255 7304 7355 7404 7455 7504 7555 7605 7655 7705 7755
MultiStore 7205 7256 7305 7356 7405 7456 7505 7556 7606 7656 7706 7756
SnapMirror 7206 7257 7306 7357 7406 7457 7506 7557 7607 7657 7707 7757
SnapLock Compliance 7207 7258 n/a n/a 7407 7458 n/a n/a 7608 7658 n/a n/a
SnapLock Enterprise 7208 7259 7307 7359 7408 7459 7507 7559 7609 7659 7709 7759
SnapMover n/a 7260 7308 7360 n/a 7460 7508 7560 n/a 7660 7710 7760
SnapRestore 7209 7261 7309 7361 7409 7461 7509 7561 7611 7661 7711 7761
SnapVault Primary 7210 7262 7310 7362 7410 7462 7510 7562 7612 7662 7712 7762
SnapVault Secondary 7211 7263 7311 7363 7411 7463 7511 7563 7613 7663 7713 7763
LockVault Compliance 7212 7264 n/a n/a 7412 7464 n/a n/a 7614 7664 n/a n/a
LockVault Enterprise 7213 7265 7313 7365 7413 7465 7513 7565 7615 7665 7715 7765
SyncMirror 7214 7266 7314 7366 7414 7466 7514 7566 7616 7666 7716 7766
SnapValidator 7216 7268 7316 7368 7416 7468 7516 7568 7617 7667 7717 7767
Fibre Channel Protocol 7217 7269 7317 7369 7417 7469 7517 7569 7618 7668 7718 7768
Disk Sanitization 7218 7270 n/a n/a 7418 7470 n/a n/a 7619 7669 n/a n/a
SnapManager for Exchange 7219 7271 7318 7370 7419 7471 7518 7570 7620 7670 7720 7770
SnapManager for SQL 7220 7272 7319 7371 7420 7472 7519 7571 7621 7671 7721 7771
NearStore 7230 7281 7322 7372 7430 7481 7522 7572 7622 7672 7722 7772
MetroCluster n/a 7273 n/a 7373 n/a 7473 n/a 7573 n/a 7673 n/a 7773
SAN Bundle n/a 7274 n/a n/a n/a 7474 n/a n/a n/a 7674 n/a n/a
iSCSI Protocol 7225 7275 7325 7375 7425 7475 7525 7575 7625 7675 7725 7775
Microsoft Exchange Bundle n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 7678 n/a n/a
(10000 users)
SnapMirror/SnapVault Bundle 7229 7279 7329 7379 7429 7479 7529 7579 7629 7679 7729 7779
Advanced Single Instance 7232 7282 n/a n/a 7432 7482 n/a n/a 7632 7682 n/a n/a
Storage

Chapter 3. IBM N series storage system software features


SnapManager for SharePoint n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 7649 7699 7749 7799

81
Table 53. N series software licensed function indicators (Models 2867 to 2869)

82
Description 2867 A11 2867 A21 2867 G11 2867 G21 2868 A10 2868 A20 2868 G10 2868 G20 2869 A10 2869 A20 2869 G10 2869 G20
Data ONTAP 7800 7850 7900 7950 6000 6050 6100 6150 6400 6450 6200 6250
CIFS 7801 7851 7901 7951 7601 6051 7701 6151 7401 7451 7501 7551
HTTP 7802 7852 7902 7952 7602 6052 7702 6152 7402 7452 7502 7552
NFS 7803 7853 7903 7953 7603 6053 7703 6153 7403 7453 7503 7553
CFO n/a 7854 n/a 7954 n/a 6054 n/a 6154 n/a 7454 n/a 7554
FlexClone 7805 7855 7905 7955 7605 6055 7705 6155 7404 7455 7504 7555
MultiStore 7806 7856 7906 7956 7606 6056 7706 6156 7405 7456 7505 7556
SnapMirror 7807 7857 7907 7957 7607 6057 7707 6157 7406 7457 7506 7557
SnapLock Compliance 7808 7858 n/a n/a 7608 6058 n/a n/a 7407 7458 n/a n/a
SnapLock Enterprise 7809 7859 7909 7959 7609 6059 7709 6159 7408 7459 7507 7559
SnapMover n/a 7860 7910 7960 n/a 6060 7710 6160 n/a 7460 7508 7560
SnapRestore 7811 7861 7911 7961 7611 6061 7711 6161 7409 7461 7509 7561
SnapVault Primary 7812 7862 7912 7962 7612 6062 7712 6162 7410 7462 7510 7562
SnapVault Secondary 7813 7863 7913 7963 7613 6063 7713 6163 7411 7463 7511 7563
LockVault Compliance 7814 7864 n/a n/a 7614 6064 n/a n/a 7412 7464 n/a n/a
LockVault Enterprise 7815 7865 7915 7965 7615 6065 7715 6165 7413 7465 7513 7565

IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


SyncMirror 7816 7866 7916 7966 7616 6066 7716 6166 7414 7466 7514 7566
SnapValidator 7817 7867 7917 7967 7617 6067 7717 6167 7416 7468 7516 7568
Fibre Channel Protocol 7818 7868 7918 7968 7618 6068 7718 6168 7417 7469 7517 7569
Disk Sanitization 7819 7869 n/a n/a 7619 6069 n/a n/a 7418 7470 n/a n/a
SnapManager for Exchange 7820 7870 7920 7970 7620 6070 7720 6170 7419 7471 7518 7570
SnapManager for SQL 7821 7871 7921 7971 7621 6071 7721 6171 7420 7472 7519 7571
NearStore 7822 7872 7922 7972 7622 6072 7722 6172 7430 7481 7522 7572
MetroCluster n/a 7873 n/a 7973 n/a 6073 n/a 6173 n/a 7473 n/a 7573
SAN Bundle n/a 7874 n/a n/a n/a 6074 n/a n/a n/a 7474 n/a n/a
iSCSI Protocol 7825 7875 7925 7975 7625 6075 7725 6175 7425 7475 7525 7575
Microsoft Exchange Bundle n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 6078 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
(5000 users)
SnapMirror/SnapVault Bundle 7829 7879 7929 7979 7629 6079 7729 6179 7429 7479 7529 7579
Advanced Single Instance 7832 7882 n/a n/a 7632 6082 n/a n/a 7432 7482 n/a n/a
Storage
SnapManager for SharePoint 7849 7899 7949 7999 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
IBM N series host software features
This section describes the host software features available for your N series storage
system. Host software features are installed directly on the host that supports your
N series storage system.
Operation Manager Core (OMC)
The OMC features are designed to provide a central point of control and to
provide alerts, reports, and configuration tools. These tools are designed to
help manage storage and content delivery infrastructure, consistent with
business requirements, and help maximize availability and reduce total cost
of ownership.
Protection Manager
The Protection Manager feature provides backup and replication
management software for an N series disk-based data protection
environment. It is designed to help protect data and support high
productivity by providing policy-based management, including when used in
automated data protection configurations.
Single Mailbox Recovery
Single Mailbox Recovery (SMBR) adds advanced function to the
SnapManager for Exchange feature. Single Mailbox Recovery restores
individual mail items from any recent (hourly, daily, or weekly) snapshot.
This helps allow rapid search of archived snapshot copies of previously
deleted messages that are no longer in the current mailbox. Single Mailbox
Recovery also includes Extract Wizards for Microsoft NT Backup, VERITAS
Backup Exec, and, optionally, Extract Wizards for CA BrightStor ARCserve,
Legato NetWorker, and VERITAS Net Backup. The Extract Wizards are
designed to restore both private and public exchange information and
stored data from tape or disk backups to any alternate location (machine,
volume, or folder), thereby helping to eliminate the need for a recovery
server.
SMBR Content Analysis Wizard
The SMBR Content Analysis Wizard (CAW) is designed to enable you to
automate and save search results with Microsoft Exchange by selecting
sources, including entire Exchange Database (EDB) files, individual
mailboxes from an EDB, or folders from an EDB. Any number of sources is
allowed.
SnapDrive™
SnapDrive provides a software application designed to enhance the storage
management capabilities in an operating system environment, including
easier management of dynamic volume, cluster, snapshot, and replication
management.
SnapManager for SQL
SnapManager for SQL is designed to help reduce backup and restore times
of SQL databases by using backups based upon snapshot copies.
SnapManager for SQL enables simultaneous backup of multiple databases
using minimal disk space for each additional full backup.
SnapManager for Exchange
SnapManager for Exchange is designed to help streamline storage
management while simplifying configuration, backup, and restore operations
for Microsoft Exchange databases.

Chapter 3. IBM N series storage system software features 83


SnapManager for Oracle
SnapManager for Oracle allows connection of one Oracle host server to a
storage controller.
Table 54. IBM N series host software
Description Feature
SnapDrive - AIX 1-2 Procs 8000
SnapDrive - AIX 3-4 Procs 8001
SnapDrive - AIX 5-8 Procs 8002
SnapDrive - AIX 9+ Procs 8003
SnapDrive - HP-UX 1-2 Procs 8004
SnapDrive - HP-UX 3-4 Procs 8005
SnapDrive - HP-UX 5-8 Procs 8006
SnapDrive - HP-UX 9+ Procs 8007
SnapDrive - Solaris 1-2 Procs 8008
SnapDrive - Solaris 3-4 Procs 8009
SnapDrive - Solaris 5-8 Procs 8010
SnapDrive - Solaris 9+ Procs 8011
SnapDrive - Linux 1-2 Procs 8020
SnapDrive - Linux 3-4 Procs 8021
SnapDrive - Linux 5-8 Procs 8022
SnapDrive - Linux 9+ Procs 8023
SnapDrive for UNIX Media Kit 8040
SnapDrive for Windows 8050
SnapDrive for Windows Media Kit 8051
ONTAP DSM for Windows MPIO 8052
ONTAP DSM Win MPIO Media Kit 8053
FCP Host Attach Kit - Windows 8100
Base FCP Host Attach Kit - AIX 8110
AIX Multipathing - 1-2 Procs 8111
AIX Multipathing - 3-4 Procs 8112
AIX Multipathing - 5-8 Procs 8113
AIX Multipathing - 9+ Procs 8114
AIX Media Kit for Multipath 8119
FCP Host Attach Kit - Linux 8120
FCP Host Attach Kit - HP-UX 8121
FCP Host Attach Kit - Solaris 8122
FCP Host Utilities - VMWare 8123
SnapManager for Exchange - Host 8131
SnapManager for Exchange - Media Kit 8132
SnapManager for SQL - Host 8141
SnapManager for SQL - Media Kit 8142
SnapManager for Oracle 8143

84 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Table 54. IBM N series host software (continued)
Description Feature
SnapManager for Oracle - Media Kit 8144
SnapManager for SAP 8145
SnapManager for SAP - Media Kit 8146
SnapManager for SharePoint 8147
SnapManager for SharePoint - Media Kit 8148
Single Mailbox Recovery 100 pk 8150
Single Mailbox Recovery 500 pk 8151
Single Mailbox Recovery 1000 pk 8152
Single Mailbox Recovery 2500 pk 8153
Single Mailbox Recovery 5K pk 8154
Single Mailbox Recovery 10K pk 8155
Single Mailbox Recovery 50K pk 8156
Single Mailbox Recovery Media Kit 8157
Single Mailbox Recovery CA-ARCSERVE Extract Wizard 8158
®
Single Mailbox Recovery Tivoli Tape Extract Wizard 8159
Single Mailbox Recovery Legato Tape Extract Wizard 8160
Single Mailbox Recovery NetBackup Extract Wizard 8161
Single Mailbox Recovery PST Tape Extract Wizard 8162
Single Mailbox Recovery HP Extract Wizard 8163
Single Mailbox Recovery Commvault Galaxy Ex Wizard 8164
Single Mailbox Recovery UltraBac Extract Wizard 8165
Single Mailbox Recovery Agent for Advanced Search 8166
Single Mailbox Recovery Content Analysis Wizard 8167
Operations Manager Store Resource Management 8257
Operations Manager Media Kit 8258
Operations Manager Core tier 1 license 8261
Operations Manager Core tier 2 license 8262
Operations Manager Core tier 3 license 8263
Operations Manager Core tier 4 license 8264
Operations Manager Core tier 5 license 8265
Operations Manager Core tier 6 license 8266
Operations Manager Core tier 7 license 8267
Protect Manager tier 1 license 8268
Protect Manager tier 1 license 8269
Protect Manager tier 1 license 8270
Protect Manager tier 1 license 8271
Protect Manager tier 1 license 8272
Protect Manager tier 1 license 8273
Protect Manager tier 1 license 8274

Chapter 3. IBM N series storage system software features 85


86 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide
Chapter 4. Site planning
This chapter contains information for site planning for the N series storage systems
and expansion units.

Hardware specifications
The following sections list the hardware specifications for the following N series
storage systems and expansion units:
v “N3300 and N3600 hardware specifications”
v “N3700 hardware specifications” on page 95
v “N5000 series system hardware specifications” on page 97
v “N7000 series hardware specifications” on page 101
v “EXN1000 hardware specifications” on page 103
v “EXN2000 and EXN4000 hardware specifications” on page 105

N3300 and N3600 hardware specifications


The following tables list the physical characteristics and environmental and electrical
requirements for N3300 and N3600 storage systems.

CAUTION:
Two people are required to lift the N3300 system during installation. Three
people are required to lift the N3600 system during installation.
Table 55. N3300 and N3600 system hardware specifications
Physical characteristics
Weight 2859-A10, 2859-A20 Active/active: 66 lbs (30 kg) full

Single controller: 64 lbs (28 kg)


empty
2862-A10, 2862-A20 Active/active: 112 lbs (51 kg) full

Single controller: 110 lbs (50 kg)


empty
Rack units 2859-A10, 2859-A20 2U
2862-A10, 2862-A20 4U
Height 2859-A10, 2859-A20 3.45 in. (8.75 cm)
2862-A10, 2862-A20 6.95 in. (17.75 cm)
Width 17.7 in. (44.9 cm)
Depth 2859-A10, 2859-A20 56 cm (22 in)
2862-A10, 2862-A20 58.5 cm (23 in)
Clearance dimensions
Front-cooling All versions 10 in. (25.4 cm)
Rear-cooling All versions 12 in. (30.5 cm)
Front-maintenance All versions 30 in. (76.2 cm)
Rear-maintenance All versions 30 in. (76.2 cm)

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2008 87


Table 56. N3300 and N3600 system environmental requirements
Environmental requirements
Note: Operating at the extremes of the following environmental requirements might
increase the risk of device failure.
Operating temperature maximum range 50° F to 104° F

(10° C to 40° C)
Operating temperature recommended range 68° F to 77° F

(20° C to 25° C)
Nonoperating temperature range -40° F to 140° F

(-40° C to 60° C)
Relative humidity 20 to 80%
noncondensing
Recommended operating temperature relative humidity range 40 to 55%
Maximum wet bulb temperature 28° C (82° F)
2, 3
Maximum altitude 3050 m (10,000 ft.)
1, 4
Acoustic level N3300 54 dBA @ 23° C

7.2 bels @ 23° C


N3600 49 dBA @ 23° C

6.7 bels @ 23° C


1. Noise emission notes:
a. LWAd is the declared sound power emission level for a production series of machines.
b. LpAm is the mean value of the sound pressure emission levels at the operator
position (if any) for a production series of machines.
c. <LpA>m is the mean value of the space-averaged sound pressure emission levels at
the one-meter positions for a production series of machines.
d. N/A = Not Applicable (no operator position).
e. All measurements are made in accordance with ISO DIS 779 and reported in
conformance with ISO DIS 7574/4.
f. N/A - not available.
2. The upper limit of the dry bulb temperature must be derated 1° C per 137 m (450 ft)
above 915 m (3000 ft).
3. The upper limit of the wet bulb temperature must be derated 1° C per 274 m (900 ft)
above 305 m (1000 ft).
4. Levels are for a single system installed in a 2101-N00 36U EIA rack with the center of
the unit approximately 1500 mm (59 in.) off the floor.
5. All measurements made in accordance with ISO 7779, and declared in conformance
with ISO 9296.

The following tables list the maximum electrical power for the N3300 and N3600
and the electrical requirements for different configurations of the N3300 and N3600
systems.
Table 57. N3300 and N3600 maximum electrical power
System Maximum electrical power
N3300 100-240 V ac, 10-4 A per node, 50-60 Hz
N3600 100-240 V ac, 12-5 A per node, 50-60 Hz

88 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Note: In the following tables, Worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU
and high fan speed, with power distributed over one power cord. Per PSU
indicates typical power needs, per PSU, for a system operating under normal
condition. System indicates typical power needs for two PSUs in a system
operating under normal condition and power distributed over two power
cords.
Table 58. N3300 electrical requirements - one controller module
100 to 120V 200 to 240V
Disk Worst- Worst-
Input voltage drives case Per PSU System case Per PSU System
Input current 144 GB 3.83 1.7 3.39 1.94 0.94 1.87
measured, A SAS
drives
300 GB 4.44 1.95 3.89 2.23 1.08 2.16
SAS
drives
250 GB 3.07 1.47 2.94 1.60 0.79 1.57
SATA
drives
500 GB 3.22 1.55 3.09 1.68 0.81 1.61
SATA
drives
750 GB 3.37 1.61 3.22 1.69 0.83 1.66
SATA
drives
Input power 144 GB 377 165 330 371 174 348
measured, W SAS
drives
300 GB 439 191 381 431 204 407
SAS
drives
250 GB 300 144 287 304 145 289
SATA
drives
500 GB 319 151 301 322 147 294
SATA
drives
750 GB 332 158 316 327 152.5 305
SATA
drives

Chapter 4. Site planning 89


Table 58. N3300 electrical requirements - one controller module (continued)
100 to 120V 200 to 240V
Disk Worst- Worst-
Input voltage drives case Per PSU System case Per PSU System
Thermal 144 GB 1287 563 1125 1264 593 1185
dissipation, SAS
BTU/hr drives
300 GB 1497 649 1298 1470 669 1338
SAS
drives
250 GB 1024 490 979 1035 494 987
SATA
drives
500 GB 1088 514 1028 1099 501 1002
SATA
drives
750 GB 1133 539 1077 1114 520 1039
SATA
drives
Inrush peak, A All drives 16 16 16 34 34 34
Input power frequency, Hz 50 to 60

Table 59. N3300 electrical requirements - two controller modules


100 to 120V 200 to 240V
Disk Worst- Worst-
Input voltage drives case Per PSU System case Per PSU System
Input current 144 GB 4.69 2.05 4.09 2.34 1.11 2.22
measured, A SAS
drives
300 GB 4.94 2.38 4.75 2.45 1.19 2.37
SAS
drives
250 GB 3.82 1.86 3.72 1.91 0.93 1.86
SATA
drives
500 GB 3.94 1.90 3.80 1.97 0.97 1.93
SATA
drives
750 GB 4.13 1.95 3.89 2.09 0.99 1.98
SATA
drives

90 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Table 59. N3300 electrical requirements - two controller modules (continued)
100 to 120V 200 to 240V
Disk Worst- Worst-
Input voltage drives case Per PSU System case Per PSU System
Input power 144 GB 464 200 400 452 210 419
measured, W SAS
drives
300 GB 488 233 465 476 224 448
SAS
drives
250 GB 377 183 365 367 173 345
SATA
drives
500 GB 389 186 372 381 180 360
SATA
drives
750 GB 409 191 382 404 186 372
SATA
drives
Thermal 144 GB 1583 683 1365 1542 714.5 1429
dissipation, SAS
BTU/hr drives
300 GB 1665 794 1587 1624 715 1527
SAS
drives
250 GB 1287 623 1245 1253 589 1178
SATA
drives
500 GB 1328 634 1268 1298 614 1227
SATA
drives
750 GB 1395 651 1302 1377 634 1268
SATA
drives
Inrush peak, A All drives 16 16 16 34 34 34
Input power frequency, Hz 50 to 60

Table 60. N3300 electrical requirements - one controller module, no disks


100 to 120V 200 to 240V
Worst- Worst-
Input voltage case Per PSU System case Per PSU System
Input current 1.67 0.8 1.60 0.9 0.45 0.89
measured, A
Input power 165 77 153 160 75 149
measured, W
Thermal 563 261 521 544 253 506
dissipation,
BTU/hr
Inrush peak, A 16 16 16 34 34 34

Chapter 4. Site planning 91


Table 60. N3300 electrical requirements - one controller module, no disks (continued)
100 to 120V 200 to 240V
Worst- Worst-
Input voltage case Per PSU System case Per PSU System
Input power 50 to 60
frequency, Hz

Table 61. N3300 electrical requirements - two controller modules, no disks


100 to 120V 200 to 240V
Worst- Worst-
Input voltage case Per PSU System case Per PSU System
Input current 2.63 1.12 2.23 1.34 0.59 1.18
measured, A
Input power 254 108 215 240 104 208
measured, W
Thermal 866 366 731 818 355 709
dissipation,
BTU/hr
Inrush peak, A 16 16 16 34 34 34
Input power 50 to 60
frequency, Hz

Table 62. N3600 electrical requirements - one controller module


100 to 120V 200 to 240V
Disk Worst- Worst-
Input voltage drives case Per PSU System case Per PSU System
Input current 144 GB 5.64 2.38 4.76 2.82 1.33 2.65
measured, A SAS
drives
300 GB 6.62 2.96 5.92 3.27 2.76 5.52
SAS
drives
250 GB 4.40 2.02 4.04 2.30 1.04 2.07
SATA
drives
500 GB 4.64 2.18 4.36 2.33 1.09 2.17
SATA
drives
750 GB 5.07 2.26 4.51 2.46 1.20 2.40
SATA
drives

92 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Table 62. N3600 electrical requirements - one controller module (continued)
100 to 120V 200 to 240V
Disk Worst- Worst-
Input voltage drives case Per PSU System case Per PSU System
Input power 144 GB 560 233 465 547 251 502
measured, W SAS
drives
300 GB 658 292 583 636 262 523
SAS
drives
250 GB 435 197 393 439 193 386
SATA
drives
500 GB 459 213 425 447 204 408
SATA
drives
750 GB 504 220 439 474 224 447
SATA
drives
Thermal 144 GB 1909 794 1587 1864 855 1710
dissipation, SAS
BTU/hr drives
300 GB 2243 994 1988 2165 891 1782
SAS
drives
250 GB 1482 670 1339 1497 659 1317
SATA
drives
500 GB 1564 724 1448 1523 696 1392
SATA
drives
750 GB 1718 749 1497 1617 762 1523
SATA
drives
Inrush peak, A All drives 20 19 19 40 36 36
Input power frequency, Hz 50 to 60

Chapter 4. Site planning 93


Table 63. N3600 electrical requirements - two controller modules
100 to 120V 200 to 240V
Disk Worst- Worst-
Input voltage drives case Per PSU System case Per PSU System
Input current 144 GB 6.31 2.84 5.68 3.09 1.45 2.89
measured, A SAS
drives
300 GB 7.51 3.34 6.68 3.73 1.71 3.41
SAS
drives
250 GB 5.54 2.49 4.98 2.7 1.26 2.52
SATA
drives
500 GB 5.74 2.84 5.67 2.89 1.33 2.65
SATA
drives
750 GB 5.91 2.74 5.74 2.97 1.39 2.77
SATA
drives
Input power 144 GB 628 279 558 600 275 550
measured, W SAS
drives
300 GB 747 330 659 728 328 655
SAS
drives
250 GB 549 244 487 518 237 474
SATA
drives
500 GB 567 277 554 561 252 503
SATA
drives
750 GB 585 268 536 575 262 524
SATA
drives
Thermal 144 GB 2142 951 1902 2044 938 1876
dissipation, SAS
BTU/hr drives
300 GB 2547 1124 2247 2483 1116 2232
SAS
drives
250 GB 1872 831 1662 1767 809 1617
SATA
drives
500 GB 1932 946 1891 1913 857 1714
SATA
drives
750 GB 1996 914 1827 1962 893 1785
SATA
drives
Inrush peak, A All drives 20 19 19 40 36 36
Input power frequency, Hz 50 to 60

94 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Table 64. N3600 electrical requirements - one controller module, no disks
100 to 120V 200 to 240V
Worst- Worst-
Input voltage case Per PSU System case Per PSU System
Input current 2.10 0.90 1.80 1.10 0.50 0.99
measured, A
Input power 205 86.5 173 198 84 168
measured, W
Thermal 698 295 589 675 287 574
dissipation,
BTU/hr
Inrush peak, A 20 19 19 40 36 36
Input power 50 to 60
frequency, Hz

Table 65. N3600 electrical requirements - two controller modules, no disks


100 to 120V 200 to 240V
Worst- Worst-
Input voltage case Per PSU System case Per PSU System
Input current 2.62 1.19 2.37 1.35 0.62 1.24
measured, A
Input power 256 114 227 250 111 222
measured, W
Thermal 874 387 773 851 379 758
dissipation,
BTU/hr
Inrush peak, A 20 19 19 40 36 36
Input power 50 to 60
frequency, Hz

N3700 hardware specifications


The following tables list the physical characteristics and environmental and electrical
requirements for your N3700 storage system.

DANGER
Three people are required to lift the N3700 during installation. Do not
remove the disk drives to reduce the weight.

Table 66. N3700 physical characteristics and environmental requirements


Physical characteristics
Weight With maximum 78.8 lbs (35.8 kg)
number of disk drives
Empty 50.6 lbs (23 kg)
Rack units 3U
Height 5.25 in. (13.3 cm)
Width 17.6 in. (44.8 cm)
Depth 20 in. (50.9 cm)

Chapter 4. Site planning 95


Table 66. N3700 physical characteristics and environmental requirements (continued)
Clearance dimensions
Front-cooling All versions 6 in. (15.3 cm)
Rear-cooling All versions 12 in. (30.5 cm)
Rear-maintenance All versions 12 in. (30.5 cm)
Environmental requirements
Note: Operating at the extremes of the following environmental requirements might
increase the risk of device failure.
Operating temperature maximum range 50° F to 104° F

(10° C to 40° C)
Operating temperature recommended range 68° F to 77° F

(20° C to 25° C)
Nonoperating temperature range -40° F to 149° F

(-40° C to 65° C)
Relative humidity 10 to 90%
noncondensing
Recommended operating temperature 40 to 55%
relative humidity range
Maximum wet bulb temperature 28° C (82° F)
2, 3
Maximum altitude 3050 m (10,000 ft.)
1, 4
Acoustic level 56.4 dBA @ 23° C

5.64 bels @ 23° C


1. Noise emission notes:
a. LWAd is the declared sound power emission level for a production series of machines.
b. LpAm is the mean value of the sound pressure emission levels at the operator
position (if any) for a production series of machines.
c. <LpA>m is the mean value of the space-averaged sound pressure emission levels at
the one-meter positions for a production series of machines.
d. N/A = Not Applicable (no operator position).
e. All measurements are made in accordance with ISO DIS 779 and reported in
conformance with ISO DIS 7574/4.
f. N/A - not available.
2. The upper limit of the dry bulb temperature must be derated 1° C per 137 m (450 ft)
above 915 m (3000 ft).
3. The upper limit of the wet bulb temperature must be derated 1° C per 274 m (900 ft)
above 305 m (1000 ft).
4. Levels are for a single system installed in a 2101-N00 36U EIA rack with the center of
the unit approximately 1500 mm (59 in.) off the floor.
5. All measurements made in accordance with ISO 7779, and declared in conformance
with ISO 9296.

96 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Table 67. N3700 electrical requirements
100 to 120V 200 to 240V
Typical Typical
single single
PSU/ PSU/
Input voltage Disk drives Worst-case system Worst-case system
Input current 10K drives 3.12 1.88/3.76 1.52 0.92/1.83
measured, A
15K drives 3.83 2.15/4.30 1.83 1.04
Input power 10K drives 311 187.5/375 299 177.5/355
measured, W
15K drives 382 214.5/429 361 202.5/405
Thermal dissipation, 10K drives 1062 639.5/1279 1020 606/1212
BTU/hr
15K drives 1302 731.5/1463 1230 690/1380
Inrush peak, A 10K drives 21 20 12.5 12
15K drives 21 20 12.5 12
Maximum electrical power 7A 3.5 A
Input power frequency, Hz 50 to 60

Note: Worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU and high fan speed.
Typical indicates a system running two PSUs on two circuits.

N5000 series system hardware specifications


The following tables list the hardware characteristics and environmental and
electrical requirements for N5000 series systems.
svc00168

32-55 kg (70.5-121.2 lbs)

DANGER
The weight of this part or unit is between 32 and 55 kg (70.5 and 121.2 lb).
It takes three persons to safely lift this part or unit. (C010)

Table 68. N5000 series physical characteristics and environmental requirements


Physical characteristics
Weight 2864-A10, 2864-G10, 2865-A10, 75 lbs (34 kg)
2865-G10, 2868-A10, 2868-G10,
2869-A10, 2869-G10
2864-A20, 2864-G20, 2865-A20, 150 lbs (68 kg)
2865-G20, 2868-A20, 2868-G20,
2869-A20, 2869-G20
Rack units 2864-A10, 2864-G10, 2865-A10, 3U
2865-G10, 2868-A10, 2868-G10,
2869-A10, 2869-G10
2864-A20, 2864-G20, 2865-A20, 6U
2865-G20, 2868-A20, 2868-G20,
2869-A20, 2869-G20

Chapter 4. Site planning 97


Table 68. N5000 series physical characteristics and environmental requirements (continued)
Height 2864-A10, 2864-G10, 2865-A10, 5.12 in. (13 cm)
2865-G10, 2868-A10, 2868-G10,
2869-A10, 2869-G10
2864-A20, 2864-G20, 2865-A20, 10.6 in. (26 cm)
2865-G20, 2868-A20, 2868-G20,
2869-A20, 2869-G20
Width 17.7 in. (44.9 cm)
Depth 61 cm (24 in) without cable
management tray

76.2 cm (30 in) with cable


management tray
Clearance dimensions
Front-cooling All versions 6 in. (15.3 cm)
Rear-cooling All versions 12 in. (30.5 cm)
Rear-maintenance All versions 12 in. (30.5 cm)
Environmental requirements
Note: Operating at the extremes of the following environmental requirements might
increase the risk of device failure.
Operating temperature maximum range 50° F to 104° F

(10° C to 40° C)
Operating temperature recommended range 68° F to 77° F

(20° C to 25° C)
Nonoperating temperature range -40° F to 65° F

(-40° C to 65° C)
Relative humidity 5 to 95% noncondensing
Recommended operating temperature relative humidity 40 to 55%
range
Maximum wet bulb temperature 28° C (82° F)
2, 3
Maximum altitude 3050 m (10,000 ft.)
1, 4
Acoustic level 54 dBA @ 23° C

5.4 bels @ 23° C

98 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Table 68. N5000 series physical characteristics and environmental requirements (continued)
1. Noise emission notes:
a. LWAd is the declared sound power emission level for a production series of machines.
b. LpAm is the mean value of the sound pressure emission levels at the operator
position (if any) for a production series of machines.
c. <LpA>m is the mean value of the space-averaged sound pressure emission levels at
the one-meter positions for a production series of machines.
d. N/A = Not Applicable (no operator position).
e. All measurements are made in accordance with ISO DIS 779 and reported in
conformance with ISO DIS 7574/4.
f. N/A - not available.
2. The upper limit of the dry bulb temperature must be derated 1° C per 137 m (450 ft)
above 915 m (3000 ft).
3. The upper limit of the wet bulb temperature must be derated 1° C per 274 m (900 ft)
above 305 m (1000 ft).
4. Levels are for a single system installed in a 2101-N00 36U EIA rack with the center of
the unit approximately 1500 mm (59 in.) off the floor.
5. All measurements made in accordance with ISO 7779, and declared in conformance
with ISO 9296.

In the following tables, worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU and
high fan speed. Typical indicates a system running two PSUs on two circuits.
Table 69. N5200 electrical requirements
100 to 120V 200 to 240V -40 to -60V
Typical Typical Typical
single single single
Worst- PSU/ Worst- PSU/ Worst- PSU/
Input voltage case system case system case system
Input current 3.39 1.2/2.4 1.77 0.71/1.40 8.2 2.85/5.70
measured, A
Input power 336 118/236 329 115/229 328 113/226
measured, W
Thermal 1144 402.5/805 1122 392/783 1118 286/771
dissipation,
BTU/hr
Inrush peak, A 38 37 40 40 n/a n/a
Maximum 10 A 5A n/a n/a
electrical power
Input power 50 to 60 n/a n/a
frequency, Hz

Table 70. N5300 electrical requirements


100 to 120V 200 to 240V -40 to -60V
Typical Typical Typical
single single single
Worst- PSU/ Worst- PSU/ Worst- PSU/
Input voltage case system case system case system
Input current 3.66 1.7/3.4 1.9 0.95/1.9 7.94 3.7/7.4
measured, A
Input power 363 169/228 358 165/330 318 148/296
measured, W

Chapter 4. Site planning 99


Table 70. N5300 electrical requirements (continued)
100 to 120V 200 to 240V -40 to -60V
Typical Typical Typical
single single single
Worst- PSU/ Worst- PSU/ Worst- PSU/
Input voltage case system case system case system
Thermal 1238 576/1152 1221 564/1127 1084 506/1011
dissipation,
BTU/hr
Inrush peak, A 38 37 40 40 n/a n/a
Maximum 10 A 5A n/a n/a
electrical power
Input power 50 to 60 n/a n/a
frequency, Hz

Table 71. N5500 electrical requirements


100 to 120V 200 to 240V -40 to -60V
Typical Typical Typical
single single single
Worst- PSU/ Worst- PSU/ Worst- PSU/
Input voltage case system case system case system
Input current 3.88 1.7/3.4 2.04 0.95/1.9 9.49 4.0/8.0
measured, A
Input power 386 164/328 384 164/327 380 160/319
measured, W
Thermal 1317 560/1119 1309 559/1116 1295 545/1089
dissipation,
BTU/hr
Inrush peak, A 38 37 40 40 n/a n/a
Maximum 10 A 5A n/a n/a
electrical power
Input power 50 to 60 n/a n/a
frequency, Hz

Table 72. N5600 electrical requirements


100 to 120V 200 to 240V -40 to -60V
Typical Typical Typical
single single single
Worst- PSU/ Worst- PSU/ Worst- PSU/
Input voltage case system case system case system
Input current 4.03 1.85/3.7 2.06 1.05/2.1 10.57 4.7/9.4
measured, A
Input power 400 181/362 387 178/355 423 188/376
measured, W
Thermal 1365 617/1233 1320 606/1212 1442 642/1283
dissipation,
BTU/hr
Inrush peak, A 38 37 40 40 n/a n/a
Maximum 10 A 5A n/a n/a
electrical power

100 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Table 72. N5600 electrical requirements (continued)
100 to 120V 200 to 240V -40 to -60V
Typical Typical Typical
single single single
Worst- PSU/ Worst- PSU/ Worst- PSU/
Input voltage case system case system case system
Input power 50 to 60 n/a n/a
frequency, Hz

N7000 series hardware specifications


The following tables list the hardware characteristics and environmental and
electrical requirements for N7000 series systems.

svc00168

32-55 kg (70.5-121.2 lbs)

DANGER
The weight of this part or unit is between 32 and 55 kg (70.5 and 121.2 lb).
It takes three persons to safely lift this part or unit. (C010)

Table 73. N7000 series system physical characteristics and environmental requirements
Physical characteristics
Weight 2866-A11, 2866-G11, 2867-A11, 54.8 kg (121 lb)
2867-G11
2866-A21, 2866-G21, 2867-A21, 109.6 kg (242 lb)
2867-G21
Rack units 2866-A11, 2866-G11, 2867-A11, 6U
2867-G11
2866-A21, 2866-G21, 2867-A21, 12U
2867-G21
Height 2866-A11, 2866-G11, 2867-A11, 263 mm (10.4 in)
2867-G11
2866-A21, 2866-G21, 2867-A21, 526 mm (20.8 in)
2867-G21
Width 446 mm (17.6 in)
Depth 695 mm (27.4 in) without cable
management tray
782 mm (30.8 in) with cable
management tray
Clearance dimensions
Front-cooling All versions 6 in. (15.2 cm)
Front-maintenance All versions 25 in. (63.5 cm)
Rear-cooling All versions 12 in. (30.5 cm)
Rear-maintenance All versions 40 in. (102 cm)

Chapter 4. Site planning 101


Table 73. N7000 series system physical characteristics and environmental requirements (continued)
Environmental requirements
Note: Operating at the extremes of the following environmental requirements might increase the risk of device
failure.
Operating temperature maximum range 50° F to 104° F
(10° C to 40° C)
Operating temperature recommended range 68° F to 77° F
(20° C to 25° C)
Nonoperating temperature range -40° F to 149° F
(-40° C to 65° C)
Relative humidity 10 to 90% noncondensing
Recommended operating temperature relative humidity 40 to 55%
range
Maximum wet bulb temperature 28° C (82° F)
,2 3
Maximum altitude 2133 m (7,000 ft.)
1, 4
Acoustic level 49 dBA @ 23° C
5 bels @ 23° C
1. Noise emission notes:
a. LWAd is the declared sound power emission level for a production series of machines.
b. LpAm is the mean value of the sound pressure emission levels at the operator position (if any) for a production
series of machines.
c. <LpA>m is the mean value of the space-averaged sound pressure emission levels at the one-meter positions
for a production series of machines.
d. N/A = Not Applicable (no operator position).
e. All measurements are made in accordance with ISO DIS 779 and reported in conformance with ISO DIS
7574/4.
f. N/A - not available.
2. The upper limit of the dry bulb temperature must be derated 1° C per 137 m (450 ft) above 915 m (3000 ft).
3. The upper limit of the wet bulb temperature must be derated 1° C per 274 m (900 ft) above 305 m (1000 ft).
4. Levels are for a single system installed in a 2101-N00 36U EIA rack with the center of the unit approximately
1500 mm (59 in.) off the floor.
5. All measurements made in accordance with ISO 7779, and declared in conformance with ISO 9296.

In the following tables, worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU and
high fan speed. Typical indicates a system running two PSUs on two circuits.
Table 74. N7700 electrical requirements
100 to 120V 200 to 240V
Typical single Typical single
Input voltage Worst-case PSU/system Worst-case PSU/system
Input current measured, 9.26 2.75/5.4 4.6 1.4/2.8
A
Input power measured, 922 266/531 882 255/509
W
Thermal dissipation, 3144 906/1812 3008 869/1737
BTU/hr
Inrush peak, A 11.6 11.2 22.8 22.8
Maximum electrical 12 A 6A
power
Input power frequency, 50 to 60
Hz

102 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Table 75. N7900 electrical requirements
100 to 120V 200 to 240V
Typical single Typical single
Input voltage Worst-case PSU/system Worst-case PSU/system
Input current measured, 9.72 2.8/5.6 4.84 1.45/2.9
A
Input power measured, 966 274/548 928 266/532
W
Thermal dissipation, 3293 935/1870 3166 908/1816
BTU/hr
Inrush peak, A 11.6 11.2 22.8 22.8
Maximum electrical 12 A 6A
power
Input power frequency, 50 to 60
Hz

EXN1000 hardware specifications


The following table lists the characteristics and requirements for the EXN1000
storage expansion unit.

DANGER
Three people are required to lift the EXN1000 during installation.

The following tables list the characteristics and requirements for your hardware.
Table 76. EXN1000 physical characteristics and environmental requirements
Physical characteristics
Weight With maximum 77 lbs (35 kg)
number of disk drives
Empty 50.6 lbs (23 kg)
Rack units 3U
Height 5.25 in. (13.3 cm)
Width 17.6 in. (44.8 cm)
Depth 20 in. (50.9 cm)
Clearance dimensions
Front-cooling All versions 6 in. (15.3 cm)
Front-maintenance All versions 25 in. (63.5)
Rear-cooling All versions 12 in. (30.5 cm)
Rear-maintenance All versions 12 in. (30.5 cm)
Environmental requirements
Note: Operating at the extremes of the following environmental requirements might
increase the risk of device failure.

Chapter 4. Site planning 103


Table 76. EXN1000 physical characteristics and environmental requirements (continued)
Operating temperature maximum range 50° F to 104° F

(10° C to 40° C)
Operating temperature recommended range 68° F to 77° F

(20° C to 25° C)
Nonoperating temperature range -40° F to 149° F

(-40° C to 65° C)
Relative humidity 10 to 90%
noncondensing
Recommended operating temperature 40 to 55%
relative humidity range
Maximum wet bulb temperature 28° C (82° F)
2, 3
Maximum altitude 3050 m (10,000 ft.)
1, 4
Acoustic level 56.4 dBA @ 23° C

5.64 bels @ 23° C


1. Noise emission notes:
a. LWAd is the declared sound power emission level for a production series of machines.
b. LpAm is the mean value of the sound pressure emission levels at the operator
position (if any) for a production series of machines.
c. <LpA>m is the mean value of the space-averaged sound pressure emission levels at
the one-meter positions for a production series of machines.
d. N/A = Not Applicable (no operator position).
e. All measurements are made in accordance with ISO DIS 779 and reported in
conformance with ISO DIS 7574/4.
f. N/A - not available.
2. The upper limit of the dry bulb temperature must be derated 1° C per 137 m (450 ft)
above 915 m (3000 ft).
3. The upper limit of the wet bulb temperature must be derated 1° C per 274 m (900 ft)
above 305 m (1000 ft).
4. Levels are for a single system installed in a 2101-N00 36U EIA rack with the center of
the unit approximately 1500 mm (59 in.) off the floor.
5. All measurements made in accordance with ISO 7779, and declared in conformance
with ISO 9296.

Table 77. EXN1000 electrical requirements


100 to 120V 200 to 240V
Typical Typical
single single
PSU/ PSU/
Input voltage Disk drives Worst-case system Worst-case system
Input current 7.2K drives 2.85 1.56/3.12 1.43 0.78/1.56
measured, A
Input power 7.2K drives 284 155/310 283 152/304
measured, W
Thermal dissipation, 7.2K drives 968 529/1058 964 517.5/1035
BTU/hr
Inrush peak, A 7.2K drives 21 20 12.5 12.0
Input power frequency, Hz 50 to 60
Maximum electrical power 7A 3.5 A

104 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Note: Worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU and high fan speed.
Typical indicates a system running two PSUs on two circuits.

EXN2000 and EXN4000 hardware specifications


The following tables list the characteristics and requirements for your EXN2000 or
EXN4000 storage expansion unit.

DANGER
Three people are required to lift the EXN2000 or EXN4000 during
installation.

Table 78. EXN2000 and EXN4000 physical characteristics and environmental requirements
Physical characteristics
Weight With maximum 77 lbs (35 kg)
number of disk drives
Empty 50.6 lbs (23 kg)
Rack units 3U
Height 5.25 in. (13.3 cm)
Width 17.6 in. (44.8 cm)
Depth 20 in. (50.9 cm)
Clearance dimensions
Front-cooling All versions 6 in. (15.3 cm)
Rear-cooling All versions 12 in. (30.5 cm)
Rear-maintenance All versions 12 in. (30.5 cm)
Environmental requirements
Note: Operating at the extremes of the following environmental requirements might
increase the risk of device failure.
Operating temperature maximum range 50° F to 104° F

(10° C to 40° C)
Operating temperature recommended range 68° F to 77° F

(20° C to 25° C)
Nonoperating temperature range -40° F to 149° F

(-40° C to 65° C)
Relative humidity 10 to 90%
noncondensing
Recommended operating temperature 40 to 55%
relative humidity range
Maximum wet bulb temperature 28° C (82° F)
2, 3
Maximum altitude 3050 m (10,000 ft.)
1, 4
Acoustic level 56.4 dBA @ 23° C

5.64 bels @ 23° C

Chapter 4. Site planning 105


Table 78. EXN2000 and EXN4000 physical characteristics and environmental
requirements (continued)
1. Noise emission notes:
a. LWAd is the declared sound power emission level for a production series of machines.
b. LpAm is the mean value of the sound pressure emission levels at the operator
position (if any) for a production series of machines.
c. <LpA>m is the mean value of the space-averaged sound pressure emission levels at
the one-meter positions for a production series of machines.
d. N/A = Not Applicable (no operator position).
e. All measurements are made in accordance with ISO DIS 779 and reported in
conformance with ISO DIS 7574/4.
f. N/A - not available.
2. The upper limit of the dry bulb temperature must be derated 1° C per 137 m (450 ft)
above 915 m (3000 ft).
3. The upper limit of the wet bulb temperature must be derated 1° C per 274 m (900 ft)
above 305 m (1000 ft).
4. Levels are for a single system installed in a 2101-N00 36U EIA rack with the center of
the unit approximately 1500 mm (59 in.) off the floor.
5. All measurements made in accordance with ISO 7779, and declared in conformance
with ISO 9296.

Table 79. EXN2000 and EXN4000 electrical requirements


100 to 120V 200 to 240V
Typical Typical
single single
PSU/ PSU/
Input voltage Disk drives Worst-case system Worst-case system
Input current 10K drives 2.81 1.51/3.01 1.38 0.76/1.51
measured, A
15K drives 3.42 1.83/3.65 1.66 0.91/1.82
Input power 10K drives 279 148.5/299 272 145/290
measured, W
15K drives 342 181.5/363 329 176.5/353
Thermal dissipation, 10K drives 953 510/1020 926 495/990
BTU/hr
15K drives 1167 619/1238 1122 602/1204
Inrush peak, A 10K drives 21 20 12.5 12
15K drives 21 20 12.5 12
Input power frequency, Hz 50 to 60
Maximum electrical power 7A 3.5 A

Note: Worst-case indicates a system running with one PSU and high fan speed.
Typical indicates a system running two PSUs on two circuits.

Important factors to consider


When installing the N series storage system, you must keep in mind certain
environmental factors. When you are planning your installation give careful
consideration to the following:
v Weight of the N series storage system. See “Hardware specifications” on page
87. The N series storage system requires three people to install it.
v Rack considerations. The clearances and mounting requirements are specified in
“Rack considerations” on page 107.

106 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


v Power supplies and power requirements. You may need to provide new service
or install an Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS). See “Power supplies and power
requirements” for more information.
v System input power. See “System input power” on page 108 for more
information.
v Thermal considerations. See “Thermal considerations” on page 109.
v Floor loading. See “Floor-loading specifications” on page 110.
v Floor planning. See “Floor plan considerations” on page 110 for more
information.
v Cabling. Both Ethernet and Fibre Channel cabling will be required. See
Chapter 5, “Cable planning,” on page 113.
v AutoSupport. AutoSupport is a sophisticated, event-driven logging agent featured
in the Data ONTAP operating software and inside each N series storage systems
that continuously monitors the health of your system. See Chapter 6,
“AutoSupport,” on page 119.

Rack considerations
The three recommended racks for the N series storage system are:
v IBM 7014 Model T00 (a 36U high rack)
v IBM 7014 Model T42 (a 42U high rack)
v IBM 2101 Model N00 (a 36U high rack)

The N series storage system can also be mounted in some other IBM and non-IBM
racks, provided the rack meets all the requirements specified in Appendix D,
“Specifications for IBM and non-IBM racks,” on page 133.

When clustering N series storage systems, the physical proximity of the cluster
nodes is determined by the Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables that are
ordered. Feature codes are available for cluster cables ranging in size from 2 m to
30 m. For more information, see Chapter 2, “IBM N series hardware features,” on
page 7.

Power supplies and power requirements


N series storage systems contain two hot-swappable power supplies. They are both
active at the same time, but have sufficient capacity that if one fails the other can
assume the full load. Each power supply has a separate power cord. Separate
power sources for each power cord are recommended.

Power cords with attached plugs are provided for most ac-powered systems. The
power cords are ordered by feature code and at least one power cord must be
specified when the ordering the N series storage system. A feature code contains
two cords, one for each power supply. Power cables vary by country and are listed
in Appendix B, “Power cord list for N series storage systems,” on page 123.

Specific voltage information for NAS storage systems and expansion units is
provided in the following tables:
v N3300 storage systems:
– Table 58 on page 89
– Table 59 on page 90
– Table 60 on page 91

Chapter 4. Site planning 107


– Table 61 on page 92
v N3600 storage systems:
– Table 62 on page 92
– Table 63 on page 94
– Table 64 on page 95
– Table 65 on page 95
v N3700 storage systems: Table 67 on page 97
v N5000 series storage systems:
– Table 69 on page 99
– Table 70 on page 99
– Table 71 on page 100
– Table 72 on page 100
v N7000 series storage systems:
– Table 74 on page 102
– Table 75 on page 103
v EXN1000 expansion units: Table 77 on page 104
v EXN2000 and EXN4000 expansion units: Table 79 on page 106
Important:
1. Before you install the N series storage system, you must make sure that its
proposed location meets the power requirements. If necessary, consult an
electrician to determine if your electrical infrastructure can support the N series
storage system that you are installing.
2. Consider security when planning your power requirements. (For example, your
power mains should be in a secure area.) See “Security” on page 111 for more
information.

System input power


The following input power considerations apply to all system units. See “Rack
considerations” on page 107 for additional information about power.

Electrical considerations
These topics should be considered before you install a system.

Primary computer power service


Although a dedicated power supply is not necessary, for maximum reliability, the
computer power panel should connect to feeders that do not serve other loads.
Connect electrical noise-producing devices to panels separate from those feeding
the system units.

Grounding
For information about grounding your N series storage systems and expansion
units, refer to the Installation and Setup Instructions for your N series products.

To ensure proper grounding, a licensed electrician should check the grounding and
receptacles for conformance with the country electrical codes.

108 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Computer room emergency power-off controls
As a safety precaution, you should provide computer room emergency power-off
controls for disconnecting the main service wiring that supplies the computer
equipment. Install these controls at a convenient place for the operator and next to
the main exit doors of the room.

Lightning protection
You should install lightning protection devices when in environments such as these:
v An overhead power service supplies the primary power.
v The area is subject to electrical storms or equivalent-type power surges.

Three-phase power
If your rack power distribution uses three-phase power, consult a licensed
electrician to ensure that the loads are properly balanced.

Thermal considerations
When installed in a rack, all components, including the N series storage system,
should have front-to-back air flow. Failure to do so results in a thermal loop, where
the heated exhaust air from one unit is drawn into the air intake of another, which
further heats the air. Eventually a unit will shut down or fail to operate due to high
temperature.

Airflow

back

Racks
front
Perforated tiles
or gratings
1220 mm cold
aisle width Cold aisle
Airflow
conditioner

front
2440 mm between
Racks
Air

center lines of hot


and cold aisle
back

Hot aisle
back

Racks
Nsipg001

front

Airflow

Figure 4. Example of cold aisle/hot aisle rack cabinet configuration

Chapter 4. Site planning 109


Floor-loading specifications
Consult with an engineer to determine your floor-loading specifications. See
“Hardware specifications” on page 87 for information on the N series storage
system weight. See Appendix D, “Specifications for IBM and non-IBM racks,” on
page 133 for rack floor-loading specifications.

Floor plan considerations


You need to create a floor plan before installing a N series storage system. This
section describes floor planning considerations and how to create a floor plan. It
also describes what security measures to keep in mind when doing floor planning.

Before you create your floor plan, consider these variables:


v Flow of work and personnel within the area
v Placement to optimize cooling, such as positioning the unit over a cutout in a
raised floor
v Routing of cables and length of cables
v Location of safety equipment
v Future expansion

Creating a floor plan


It is important to ensure that the total weight of installed racks and equipment does
not exceed the maximum amount of weight that the floor in your facility supports.
You need to create a floor plan before installing a N series storage system. This
section discusses floor planning considerations and how to create a floor plan. It
also discusses security measures to keep in mind when doing your floor planning.

Note: You might need to prepare and analyze several plans before choosing a final
one. If you install more than one N series storage system in more than one
installation stage, prepare a separate plan for each installation stage.

Begin with an accurate drawing of the installation area (blueprints and floor plans
are appropriate). Include the following items in your floor plan:
v Service and operational clearances.
v If the N series storage system will be on a raised floor, consider any objects that
might obstruct cable routing and the height of the raised floor.
v If the N series storage system will not be on a raised floor, consider these
factors:
– Placement of cables to minimize obstruction
– Amount of additional cable required if the cable is indirectly routed between N
series storage system (for example, along the walls or suspended from the
ceiling)
v Location of:
– Power receptacles
– Air conditioning equipment and controls
– File cabinets, desks, and other office equipment
– Room emergency power-off controls
– All entrances, walkways, exits, windows, columns, and pillars
v LAN and telephone connections.

110 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


When you finish the floor plan, review it to make sure that all cables to be
connected to the N series storage system are long enough. Also ensure that the N
series storage system has enough clearance.

Security
In forming your floor plan, you should consider ways to keep your N series storage
system secure. For security purposes, use these precautions:
v Choose a trusted administrator.
v Place any equipment that may disrupt operations (for example, power supplies)
in a secure location.
v Keep rack cabinet keys in a secure location.

Chapter 4. Site planning 111


112 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide
Chapter 5. Cable planning
Before ordering, the customer is asked to develop specific planning information
concerning the physical layout of the installation. This chapter can help you plan
your layout by presenting useful planning information for interconnecting the system
units and devices.

You must plan the type of cable, cable path, and cable length. Consider not only
your current needs but also your anticipated growth and the relocation of personnel.

To assist with the installation of your system, you should note cable paths on your
floor plan.

The customer is responsible for planning for the installation of interconnecting


cables, including the proper lightning and surge protection as necessary and should
contact the appropriate contractor for guidance and assistance as required.

General considerations
In preparing for cabling, consider the following:
v Where applicable, electrical and physical specifications of cables that you
currently have and plan to use with the N series storage system must be
compatible with the standards mentioned in this manual. If no standard is
specifically mentioned in this manual, the standards for the interface on that
adapter must be met.
v Lengths and paths of cables.
v Communication signal cables should be installed away from power lines or other
sources of electrical interference.
v Labeling of cables and ports you currently have in order to indicate which
devices you want attached to them.
v Electrostatic discharge (ESD) considerations. In particular, unprotected patch
panels, punch blocks, or other intermediate routing or switching devices used in
cabling can allow ESD into the network.

Note: Lightning protection must be provided on any cable that travels outside of
the building in which the system or devices are installed. Contact a cabling
vendor about providing lightning protection for those cables. Fiber-optic
cables do not require lightning protection.

The following cabling is required:


1. Power cables for power supplies and rack power distribution.
2. Category 5 or better copper Ethernet cables with RJ-45 connectors.
3. 50 or 62.5 um fiber optic cable with LC connectors for Fiber Ethernet ports.
4. 50 or 62.5 um fiber optic cable with LC connectors for Fibre Channel ports.
5. LVD SCSI cable for optional direct SCSI-attached tape backup. The connector
on the rear of the N series storage system is a VHDCI mini 68–pin connector.
6. If clustering, Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables are available for N5000
series and N7000 series models and can be ordered in the following lengths
and types:

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2008 113


Table 80. Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables
Description Machine Model Feature
2m Copper Cluster 2864, 2865 , 2866, A20/G20/A21/G21 1037
4X IB cable 2867, 2868, 2869
5m Copper Cluster 2864, 2865, 2866, A20/G20/A21/G21 1038
4X IB cable 2867, 2868, 2869
10m Copper Cluster 2864, 2865, 2866, A20/G20/A21/G21 1039
4X IB cable 2867, 2868, 2869
5m Fiber Cluster 4X 2864, 2865, 2866, A20/G20/A21/G21 1040
IB cable 2867, 2868, 2869
30m Fiber Cluster 4X 2864, 2865, 2866, A20/G20/A21/G21 1041
IB cable 2867, 2868, 2869
Copper-Fiber 2864, 2865, 2866, A20/G20/A21/G21 1042
Converter 2867, 2868, 2869

Cable measuring
Accurate measuring of cables is critical to a successful and efficient installation. Do
not guess or estimate your cable lengths.

Some cable lengths are fixed. For example, the Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect
cables are fixed length cables that restrict the physical distance of the cluster nodes
in the rack. The power cords, depending on the feature code, are also of fixed
lengths.

For the Ethernet and Fibre Channel cabling, consider the following:
1. Cabling that exits the N series storage system is typically run in a cable
management tray, included with the N series storage system.
2. Avoid sharp bends and do not route cables near rack doors to avoid crimping
cables.
3. Account for raised floor height, if appropriate.

Cable labeling
Cable labels can be used to organize your cabling. The fields on a cable label are:
Room The room number, or other information about the
physical location of the device.
Person The name of the person who uses the device.
Telephone # The nearest telephone number to the device.
Device type This could be a printer, plotter, TTY, or similar
device.
Device ID The device ID is determined when the software is
configured on the system.
Software location code The software location code is the link between the
hardware and software. This code appears in the
software configuration menus and in the hardware
diagnostic menus.

114 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Note: For specific location code information, refer
to the Diagnostic Information manual for your
system.
Adapter type The adapter type number is located on a label
attached to the end of the adapter.

Note: Some of the adapters do not have an


adapter type.
Interface Name of the asynchronous adapters, and some
network adapters, generally includes the name of
the interface. For example, Ethernet LAN or Fibre
Channel SAN.
EIA Used in a rack-type system unit to identify the
physical location of the drawer within the rack. The
label along the right side of the rack (with rear
cover open) indicates numbers from 1, at the
bottom, to 32, at the top of the rack. The number at
the bottom-right corner of the drawer is the EIA
location for this drawer.
Slot Physical position within the system unit or drawer
where the adapter is located. Each adapter slot is
identified by a single digit number. Usually, the
number is embossed in the adapter mounting
frame.
Connector Connector number on the adapter. Most adapters
have only one connector, so this number is 1.
Tailgate The number of the tailgate connector to which this
cable is attached if tailgates are used.
System ID If an installation has more than one system unit,
each one must be identified to prevent connecting
devices to the wrong system unit. The customer
determines the System ID.

Connecting expansion units to filers


This section describes the requirements for connecting an expansion unit to N
series filer storage systems and other expansion units. For detailed instructions
about how to install and connect one or more expansion units in a rack, or to
connect an expansion unit to your filer storage system, refer to Chapter 2, “IBM N
series hardware features,” on page 7.
v IBM strongly recommends using optical (Fibre Channel) cabling whenever
possible.
v Refer to Chapter 2, “IBM N series hardware features,” on page 7 for details about
the maximum number of drive loops, maximum number of expansion units or
hard disk drives per loop, maximum total storage capacity, and maximum total
number of hard disk drives for configurations using your N series filer storage
system. (For example, you can connect a maximum of one loop of three fully
populated expansion units to an N3700.)
v Multipath looping is recommended for all configurations to provide additional
redundancy. This includes single or dual controller and single or multiple
expansion units.

Chapter 5. Cable planning 115


v Do not mix Fibre Channel EXN2000s/EXN4000s and SATA EXN1000 expansion
units in the same loop.
v EXN4000 and EXN2000 expansion units can be mixed within the same loop, but
the speed switches on all EXN4000s and EXN2000s must be set to the same
speed (either 1 Gbps or 2 Gbps).

Note: One optical cable feature code order provides two cables. One SFP feature
code order provides two SFPs.

Expansion unit cabling requirements (filers only)


You must meet the cabling requirements discussed in the following sections when
connecting the expansion unit to an N series filer storage system or to other
expansion units.

Note: N series gateways do not support the attachment of N series EXN disk
expansion units.

For the latest information on cabling requirements, see Installation and Setup
Instructions and the Hardware and Service Guide for your storage system.

Connecting the expansion unit directly to the N series filer


storage system
When connecting the expansion unit to an N series filer storage system, you must
use appropriate cables and connectors according to the following guidelines.
v For direct connections to N3700 storage systems with early CPU module
designs: Use a NAS-to-EXP Fibre Channel copper cable (#2020 or 2022). For
attachment to an N3700 Model A10, one NAS-to-EXP Fibre Channel copper
cable is required. For attachment to an N3700 Model A20, two NAS-to-EXP Fibre
Channel copper cables are required.
v For direct connections to N3700 storage systems with current CPU module
designs: Use an LC-to-LC Fibre Channel optical cable and two SFPs for
attachment to an N3700 Model A10. Use two LC-to-LC Fibre Channel optical
cables and four SFPs for attachment to an N3700 Model A20.
v For direct connections to all other N series filer storage systems: Use
LC-to-LC Fibre Channel optical cables and SFPs.

Note: For information about the differences between early and late CPU module
designs, see “Understanding the differences between early and current
N3700 CPU modules” on page 14.

Connecting the expansion unit to other expansion units


When connecting an expansion unit to other expansion units, IBM strongly
recommends using two LC-to-LC Fibre Channel optical cables and four SFPs (two
SFPs per LC-to-LC Fibre Channel optical cable).

Note: SFP-to-SFP Fibre Channel copper cables may also be used for connections
(to a maximum of three meters) between expansion units.

You must order one cable feature code and two SFP feature codes per expansion
unit.

Connecting a gateway to external storage


You must use fiber optic cables to connect a gateway to external storage on a Fibre
Channel SAN.

116 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


See the Interoperability Matrix at the following Web site for supported devices for
your N5000 series or N7000 series gateway system.

www.ibm.com/systems/storage/network/interophome.html

Refer to the documentation for your external storage for additional information.

Chapter 5. Cable planning 117


118 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide
Chapter 6. AutoSupport
AutoSupport is a sophisticated, event-driven logging agent featured in the Data
ONTAP operating software and inside each N series storage systems that
continuously monitors the health of your system. It keeps a watchful eye on a
multitude of preset conditions, automatically sending a status message to IBM
Technical Support, and your system administrator if desired, for immediate action to
correct potential problems. AutoSupport makes sure that your storage environment
is working at top efficiency.

How does AutoSupport work?


The AutoSupport feature triggers the automatic sending of notification messages to
IBM Service and Support. AutoSupport also has the ability to send notification
messages to one or more customer-specified e-mail addresses which can alert
recipients to potential problems with the N series storage system. As necessary,
IBM Service and Support will contact customers based on the contact information in
the customer’s record for resolution of potential system problems.

Note: After an occurrence of an event, an AutoSupport notification is sent to IBM


Service and Support via HTTPS by a direct connection to the predefined
location specified in Data ONTAP.

AutoSupport is enabled by default with Data ONTAP 7.1.1 or later when you
configure your N series storage system for the first time.

IBM strongly encourages customers to enable AutoSupport. AutoSupport enables


the IBM System Storage N series machines to send diagnostic information back to
IBM when error conditions are encountered within the machines. AutoSupport can
be enabled via the command line interface via the following command:

options autosupport.enable on

AutoSupport can also be enabled via the FilerView Web browser user interface by
selecting Filer 򐂰 Configure AutoSupport in the left-hand navigation frame, and
then selecting Yes from the drop-down list box next to “AutoSupport Enabled.”

On later versions of Data ONTAP, AutoSupport is enabled by default when you


configure your N series storage system for the first time. After a grace period of 24
hours, AutoSupport messages start being generated.

Note: You can disable AutoSupport at any time using the autosupport.enable
option, but you are strongly advised to leave it enabled.

Interaction with mail hosts


N series storage systems do not function as mail hosts, they rely on another host at
the customer site that listens on the SMTP port (25) to send mail to the
customer-specified e-mail addresses. AutoSupport requires at least one host
reachable by an N series storage system that runs an SMTP server or a mail
forwarder, such as the sendmail program.

Subject line of AutoSupport e-mail messages


The subject line of the e-mail messages sent by the AutoSupport mechanism
contains a text string that identifies the reason for the notification. The subject also
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2008 119
contains a relative prioritization of the message, using syslog severity levels from
DEBUG to EMERGENCY. The messages and other information in the notification
should be used to check on the problem being reported.

The format of the subject line is as follows:

System Notification from (message)

Short e-mail messages for urgent events


Customers can specify up to five addresses of e-mail recipients in which the N
series storage systems can send a short alert notification containing only the reason
for the alert to these recipients. The short e-mail messages contain the reason for
the notification in the subject line and note the time of failure. These messages are
triggered only by specific urgent events. This feature is useful for system
administrators who read e-mail messages on alphanumeric pagers.

Recipients of AutoSupport e-mail messages


Customers can specify up to five e-mail recipient addresses for standard
AutoSupport notification.

Technical Support response


When IBM Technical Support receives an alert AutoSupport notification, it takes
corrective action to resolve the problems. IBM Technical Support initiates a case
and then contacts the customer to further investigate the situation or to provide a
corrective action to the customer.

Cluster considerations
The AutoSupport notification messages from a N series storage system in a cluster
are different from the AutoSupport notification messages from a standalone N series
storage system in the following ways:
v The subject line in the AutoSupport messages from a filer in a cluster reads
“Cluster notification” instead of “System notification.”
v The AutoSupport messages from a N series storage system in a cluster contain
information about the N series storage system’s partner, such as the partner
system ID and the partner host name.
v In takeover mode, if you reboot the live N series storage system, two
AutoSupport messages are sent to notify the e-mail recipients of the reboot. The
live N series storage system sends one message; the failed N series storage
system sends the other message.
v The live N series storage system sends an AutoSupport message after it
completes the takeover process.

120 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Appendix A. Recommended power line sizes
This appendix discusses how to determine the power line lengths running from your
N series storage system to the power source.

Recommended AC power line sizes


Longer AC power feeds need to be properly designed to preserve voltage levels to
the equipment. The wiring from the breaker panel to the power strip, which supplies
power to your N series storage system and expansion units, can often exceed 50
feet.

Note: Total AC wire length = breaker to wall or ceiling outlet + extension cable or
ceiling drop.

The following tables list the recommended conductor size for 2% voltage drop for a
particular distance in feet (taken from the Radio Engineer’s Handbook).
Table 81. 110V, single phase recommended conductor sizes
110V,
single-phase 20A circuit 30A circuit 40A circuit 50A circuit
25 feet 12 AWG 10 AWG 8 AWG 8 AWG
50 feet 8 AWG 6 AWG 6 AWG 4 AWG
75 feet 6 AWG 4 AWG 4 AWG 2 AWG

Table 82. 220V, single phase recommended conductor sizes


220V,
single-phase 20A circuit 30A circuit 40A circuit 50A circuit
25 feet 14 AWG 12 AWG 12 AWG 10 AWG
50 feet 12 AWG 10 AWG 8 AWG 8 AWG
75 feet 10 AWG 8 AWG 6 AWG 6 AWG

The following table lists the approximate equivalent wire gauge (American Wire
Gauge (AWG) to Harmonized Cordage).
Table 83. American Wire Gage to Harmonized Cordage equivalents
AWG 8 10 12
1
Harmonized, mm-mm 4.0 2.5 1.5

1
mm-mm = millimeter squared

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2008 121


122 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide
Appendix B. Power cord list for N series storage systems
This appendix contains information about FRU/CRUs and power cords for N series
products.

FRU/CRU list for N series products


For the most current FRU/CRU list for your N series product, see the following Web
site:

www.ibm.com/storage/support/nas/

Power cord list for N series products


The following list details the power cord feature codes (FCs) for N series products.
FC 9000 (All countries)
Power cord, Rack PDU
v 27 inches
v Rated 250 V/15 A
v Product end uses C14; PDU end uses C13.
FC 9001 Europe and others
Provides power cords for Austria, Belgium, Bolivia, Bulgaria, Chile, Croatia,
Czech Republic, Egypt, Estonia, European Union, Finland, France,
Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Indonesia, Latvia, Lebanon, Lithuania,
Luxemburg, Morocco, Netherlands, Norway, Peru, Poland, Portugal,
Romania, Russia, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Suriname, Sweden, Turkey
v 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A.
v Attached plug EL 211 (CEE 7-VII) designed for 200-240 V ac input.
FC 9002 United Kingdom and others
Provides power cords for United Kingdom, Costa Rica, Cyprus, Guyana,
Hong Kong, Ireland, Kuwait, Malta, Oman, Singapore, Sri Lanka
v 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A.
v Attached plug EL 210 (13A fuse) designed for 200-240 V ac input.
FC 9003 Japan
Provides power cords for Japan
v 1.83 m (6 feet), unshielded, rated 125 V/15 A.
v Attached plug EL 302 (JIS C3306) designed for 100-110 V ac input.
FC 9004 U.S., Six Feet (2 m)
Provides power cords for U.S., Canada, Mexico, Belize, Columbia, Ecuador,
El Salvador, Guatemala, Honduras, Korea, Nicaragua, Panama, Philippines,
Puerto Rico, Saudi Arabia, Thailand, Venezuela
v 1.83 m (6 feet), unshielded, rated 125 V/15 A.
v Attached plug EL 302 (Nema 5-15P) designed for 100-120 V ac input.
FC 9005 Australia, New Zealand
Provides power cords for Australia, New Zealand, Uruguay
v 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A.
v Attached plug EL 206 (AS 3112) designed for 200-240 V ac input.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2008 123


FC 9006 Switzerland, Liechtenstein
Provides power cords for Switzerland, Liechtenstein
v 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A.
v Attached plug EL 203 (SEV 1011) designed for 200-240 V ac input.
FC 9007 Argentina
Provides power cords for Argentina
v 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A.
v Attached plug EL 219 (IRAM 2073) designed for 200-240 V ac input.
FC 9008 China
Provides power cords for China
v 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A.
v Attached plug EL 602 (GB 2099/GB 1002) designed for 200-240 V ac
input.
FC 9009 Denmark
Provides power cords for Denmark
v 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A.
v Attached plug EL 213 (DHCR 107-2-D1) designed for 200-240 V ac
input.
FC 9010 India, Pakistan, South Africa
Provides power cords for India, Macau, Pakistan, South Africa
v 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A.
v Attached plug EL 208 (BS 164-1, BS 546) designed for 200-240 V ac
input.
FC 9011 Israel
Provides power cords for Israel
v 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A.
v Attached plug EL 212 (SI 32) designed for 200-240 V ac input.
FC 9012 Italy
Provides power cords for Italy
v 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A.
v Attached plug EL 502 (CEI 23-16) designed for 200-240 V ac input.
FC 9013 North America (250 V)
Provides power cords for U.S.
v 1.83 m (6 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/15 A.
v Attached plug EL 309 (NEMA 6-15P) designed for 200-240 V ac input.
FC 9014 Brazil
Provides power cords for Brazil
v 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A.
v Attached plug EL 211 (NBR 6147/2000) designed for 200-240 V ac input
FC 9015 Taiwan
Provides 125 V power cords for Taiwan
v 2.5 m (9 feet), unshielded, rated 125 V/15 A.
v Attached plug EL 302 (CNS 10917-3) designed for 100-120 V ac input.
FC 9016 Taiwan (250 V)
Provides 250 V power cords for Taiwan
v 1.83 m (6 feet), unshielded, rated 250 V/10 A.

124 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


v Attached plug EL 610 (CNS 10917, CNS 690) designed for 250 V ac
input.

Appendix B. Power cord list for N series storage systems 125


126 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide
Appendix C. IBM N series worksheets
This appendix contains the following IBM N series worksheets:
v “N3300 and N3600 system setup worksheet”
v “N3700 system setup worksheet” on page 129
v “N3700 cluster system setup worksheet” on page 130
v “N5000 series system setup information worksheet” on page 131
v “N7000 series system setup information worksheet” on page 132

N3300 and N3600 system setup worksheet


The following worksheet is for initial basic setup of your N3300 or N3600 system.
Table 84. System setup worksheet
Node B (bottom
Setup Parameters Node A (top node) node)
Hostname:
Network Configuration Information for e0a
Virtual interfaces: [Y/N]
IP address for e0a
Netmask for e0a
Should interface e0a take over partner IP
address during failover? [Y/N]
IP address or interface name to be taken
over by e0a:
Media type/speed (100tx-fd, 100tx, auto
[100/1000])
Flow control (none, receive, send, full):
Enable jumbo frames? [Y/N]
Network Configuration Information for e0b
IP address for e0b
Netmask for e0b
Should interface e0b take over partner IP
address during failover? [Y/N]
IP address or interface name to be taken
over by e0b:
Media type/speed (100tx-fd, 100tx, auto
[100/1000])
Flow control (none, receive, send, full):
Enable jumbo frames? [Y/N]
Complete setup through the Web interface?
[Y/N]
Default Gateway IP Address

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2008 127


Table 84. System setup worksheet (continued)
Node B (bottom
Setup Parameters Node A (top node) node)
Administration Host Connection Setup Note: The administration host is given
root access to the filer's /etc files for
system administration. To allow access to
/etc root access to all NFS clients, enter
RETURN below.
Name or IP address of the administration
host
Timezone (name of city or region in /etc/zoneinfo
file) [EST5EDT]
Filer location
Enter the root directory for HTTP files
[/vol/vol0/home/http]
Do you want to run DNS resolver? [Y/N]
DNS domain name (You can enter up to three nameservers.)
IP address for DNS first nameserver
Do you want another nameserver? [Y/N]
IP address for alternate nameserver
Do you want another nameserver? [Y/N]
IP address for alternate nameserver
Do you want to run NIS client? [Y/N] (default is
N)
The Baseboard Management Controller (BMC) provides remote management capabilities
including console redirection, logging, and power control. It also extends Autosupport by
sending down filer event alerts.
Would you like to configure the BMC?
[Y/N] (default is Y)
Enable DHCP on the BMC LAN interface?
[Y/N] (default is N)
IP address for the BMC
Netmask for the BMC
IP address for the BMC Gateway
Gratuitous ARP interval for the BMC [10
sec (max 60)]
The mail host is required by your system to enable BMC to sense ASUP messages when
the filer is down.
IP address or name of the mail host
IP address for the mail host
You may use Autosupport options to configure alert destinations.

128 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


N3700 system setup worksheet
The following worksheet is for initial basic setup of your N3700 system, where no
additional software is licensed. See the IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP
Software Setup Guide for your version of Data ONTAP for a worksheet for systems
that have additional licensed software.
Table 85. N3700 system setup worksheet
Do you want to configure Ethernet The default is set to No for most installations.
virtual interfaces?
Network configuration: First interface Second interface
IP address:
Netmask:
Media type/speed (100tx-fd, 100tx,
auto [100/1000]):
Flow control (none, receive, send,
full):
Enable jumbo frames?
IP Address or name of default
gateway:
Would you like to continue setup (Yes means you want to use a Web interface.)
through Web interface? (You do
this through the Setup Wizard.)
IP address or name of (Leave blank to allow root user access to /etc from any NFS client)
administration host:
Where is filer located? (Text string)
Do you want to run DNS resolver?
Do you want to run NIS client?
Host name:

Appendix C. IBM N series worksheets 129


N3700 cluster system setup worksheet
This worksheet is a planning aid for setting up clustered N3700 systems.
Table 86. N3700 cluster system setup worksheet
Setup parameters Node A Node B
Host name:
Network configuration information
Virtual interfaces:
IP address—first interface, e0a:
IP address—second interface, e0b:
Netmask—first interface, e0a:
Netmask—second interface, e0b:
Media type/speed (100tx-fd, 100tx,
auto [100/1000])—first interface,
e0a:
Media type/speed (100tx-fd, 100tx,
auto [100/1000])—second interface,
e0b:
Flow control (none, receive, send,
full)—e0a:
Flow control (none, receive, send,
full)—e0b:
Enable jumbo frames?—first
interface, e0a:
Enable jumbo frames?—second
interface, e0b:
IP address or name of default
gateway:
IP address or name of
administration host: (Leave blank
for root access to /etc from any
NFS client)
Where is the N series system
located? (Text string)
Do you want to run DNS resolver?
Do you want to run NIS client?

130 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


N5000 series system setup information worksheet
The following worksheet is for initial basic setup of your N5000 series system.
Table 87. N5000 series systems setup worksheet
Hostname:
Network Configuration Information e0a e0b e0c e0d
IP addresses: First 3 #s______._____._____
Netmask:
Should interface XXX take over a partner IP address
during failover?
Media type/speed (100tx-fd, 100tx, auto [100/1000])
Flow control (none, receive, send, full):
Enable jumbo frames?
IP address or name of default gateway:
IP address or name of administration host: (Leave
blank for root access to /etc from any NFS client)
Where is the N5200 or N5500 system located? (Text
string)
Do you want to run DNS resolver?
Do you want to run NIS client?
Would you like to configure the RLM LAN interface
[y]?
RLM IP address
RLM Netmask
RLM Gateway IP Address
Would you like to enable DHCP on the RLM LAN
interface [y]?
Please enter the name or IP address of the mail host:

Appendix C. IBM N series worksheets 131


N7000 series system setup information worksheet
You need the following information to complete the setup script for your N7000
series system.
Table 88. N7000 series systems setup worksheet
Hostname:
Network Configuration Information e0a e0b e0c e0d e0e e0f
IP addresses: First 3 #s
______._____._____
Netmask:
Media type/speed (100tx-fd, 100tx, auto
[100/1000])
Flow control (none, receive, send, full):
Enable jumbo frames?
IP address or name of default gateway:
IP address or name of administration host:
(Leave blank for root access to /etc from any
NFS client)
Where is the NAS system located? (Text
string)
Do you want to run DNS resolver?
Do you want to run NIS client?
Would you like to configure the RLM LAN
interface [y]?
RLM IP address
RLM Netmask
RLM Gateway IP Address
Would you like to enable DHCP on the RLM
LAN interface [y]?
Enter the name or IP address of the mail host:

132 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Appendix D. Specifications for IBM and non-IBM racks
This chapter provides requirements and specifications for 19″ racks used by the N
series storage system.

2101 Model N00 rack specifications


Dimensions
Height 1804 mm 71.0 in.
Capacity 36 EIA Units
With PDP - DC only 1926 mm 75.8 in.
Width without side 623 mm 24.5 in.
panels
With side panels 650 mm 25.6 in.
Depth with rear door 1042 mm 41.0 in.
only installed
Depth with front and rear 1098 mm 43.3 in.
door installed
System p (sculptured) 1147 mm 45.2 in.
style front door

Weight
Base rack 244 kg 535 lbs
Full rack¹ 816 kg 1795 lbs See “T00 and T42 rack weight distribution and floor loading” on page 137.

Electrical² (sum specified values for


drawers or enclosures in rack)
DC rack
Power source loading 8.4
maximum in kVA³
Voltage range (V dc) -40 to -60
AC rack
Power source loading 4.8
maximum in kVA (per
PDU)⁴
Voltage range (V ac) 200 to 240
Frequency (hertz) 50 or 60

Temperature (see specifications for drawers or enclosures)


requirements

Humidity requirements (see specifications for drawers or enclosures)

Noise emissions (see specifications for drawers or enclosures)

Clearances Front Back Left Right

Install/air flow Rack airflow requirements are a function of the number and type of drawers installed (see item 5 on
page 135). Refer to the individual drawer specifications.

Service 915mm (36 in.) 915mm (36 in.) 915mm (36 in.) 915mm (36 in.)

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2008 133


1. Configuration dependent, base rack weight plus the weight of the drawers mounted in the rack. The rack can support up to a
maximum weight of 35 lbs/EIA (Unit).
2. The total rack power should be derived from the sum of the power used by the drawers in the rack.
3. The Power Distribution Panel (PDP) on the DC-powered rack can hold up to eighteen (nine per power source) 48 volt 20 to 50
amp circuit breakers (configuration dependent). Each power source supports up to 8.4 kVA.
Note: Because the N series storage system is an ac-only power unit, it is not recommended that the N series storage system
be installed in a dc-only rack.
4. Each ac Power Distribution Unit (PDU) can supply 4.8 kVA. A rack can have up to four PDUs as required by the drawers
mounted in the rack.
5. All rack installations require careful site and facilities planning designed to both address the cumulative drawer heat output and
provide the airflow volumes rates necessary to comply with drawer temperature requirements.

7014 Rack specifications

Model T00 rack


Dimensions
Height 1804 mm 71.0 in.
Capacity 36 EIA Units
With PDP - DC only 1926 mm 75.8 in.
Width without side 623 mm 24.5 in.
panels
With side panels 644 mm 25.4 in.
Depth with rear door 1042 mm 41.0 in.
only
Depth with rear door and 1098 mm 43.3 in.
RS/6000® style front
door
System p (sculptured) 1147 mm 45.2 in.
style front door

Weight
Base rack 244 kg 535 lbs
Full rack¹ 816 kg 1795 lbs See “T00 and T42 rack weight distribution and floor loading” on page 137.

Electrical² (sum specified values for


drawers or enclosures in rack)
DC rack
Power source loading 8.4
maximum in kVA³
Voltage range (V dc) -40 to -60
AC rack
Power source loading 4.8
maximum in kVA (per
PDU)⁴
Voltage range (V ac) 200 to 240
Frequency (hertz) 50 or 60

Temperature (see specifications for drawers or enclosures)


requirements

Humidity requirements (see specifications for drawers or enclosures)

Noise emissions (see specifications for drawers or enclosures)

Clearances Front Back Left Right

Install/air flow Rack airflow requirements are a function of the number and type of drawers installed (see item 5 on
page 135). Refer to the individual drawer specifications.

Service 915mm (36 in.) 915mm (36 in.) 915mm (36 in.) 915mm (36 in.)

134 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


1. Configuration dependent, base rack weight plus the weight of the drawers mounted in the rack. The rack can support up to a
maximum weight of 35 lbs/EIA (Unit).
2. The total rack power should be derived from the sum of the power used by the drawers in the rack.
3. The Power Distribution Panel (PDP) on the DC-powered rack can hold up to eighteen (nine per power source) 48 volt 20 to 50
amp circuit breakers (configuration dependent). Each power source supports up to 8.4 kVA.
Note: Because the N series storage system is an ac-only power unit, it is not recommended that the N series storage system
be installed in a dc-only rack.
4. Each ac Power Distribution Unit (PDU) can supply 4.8 kVA. A rack can have up to four PDUs as required by the drawers
mounted in the rack.
5. All rack installations require careful site and facilities planning designed to both address the cumulative drawer heat output and
provide the airflow volumes rates necessary to comply with drawer temperature requirements.

Model T42 Rack


Dimensions
Height 2015 mm 79.3 in.
Capacity 42 EIA Units
With PDP - DC only Not applicable
Width without side panels 623 mm 24.5 in.
With side panels 644 mm 25.4 in.
Depth with rear door only 1042 mm 41.0 in.
Depth with rear door and RS/6000 style 1098 mm 43.3 in.
front door
System p (sculptured) style front door 1147 mm 45.2 in.

Weight
Base rack 261 kg 575 lbs
Full rack¹ 930 kg 2045 lbs See “T00 and T42 rack weight distribution and floor loading” on page
137.

Service clearance Recommended minimum vertical service clearance from floor is 2439 mm or 8 feet.

All other specifications For all other technical information, see “Model T00 rack” on page 134.

T00 and T42 service clearances and caster location


The service clearances and caster locations are shown in Figure 5 on page 136:

Appendix D. Rack Specifications 135


915 mm (36 in.) 121 (4.8)

80
Rear cover (3.1)
thickness
20 mm (0.8 in.)
Caster
Location

2921 mm
915 mm 915 mm (115 in.)
(36 in.) (36 in.)

Front cover
Side cover
thickness
thickness 2x
58 mm (2.4 in.)
10 mm (0.4 in.)

Cable opening
310 mm (12.2 in.)
915 mm (36 in.) x 50 mm (2 in.)

Front

2474 mm (97.4 in.)

Figure 5. Service clearances and caster locations for the T00 and T42 racks.

Note: Rack units are large and heavy and are not easily moved. Because
maintenance activities require access at both the front and back, extra room
needs to be allowed. The footprint shows the radius of the swinging doors on
the I/O rack. The Figure 6 shows the minimum space required.

T00 and T42 racks multiple attachments

T00 T00
or or
T42 T42
Rack Rack

Separation
25.4 mm
(1 in.)

Figure 6. Model T00 and T42 racks multiple attachments

136 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


T00 racks and T42 racks can be bolted together in a multiple rack arrangement as
shown above. A kit is available including the bolts, spacers, and decorative trim
pieces to cover the 25.4 mm (1 in.) space. For service clearances, see the service
clearances as shown in the table for the “Model T00 rack” on page 134.

T00 and T42 rack weight distribution and floor loading


The T00 and T42 racks can be extremely heavy when several drawers are present.
The following table shows the necessary weight distribution distances for the T00
and T42 racks when it is loaded.
Rack System Width (2) Depth (2) Weight distribution distance (3)
weight (1) in. (mm) in. (mm)
Front & back Left & right
lbs (kg)
in. (mm) in. (mm)
7014-T00 1795 (816) 24.5 (623) 40.2 (1021) 20.3 (515.6), 18.8 18.4 (467.4)
(4) (477.5)
7014-T00 1795 (816) 24.5 (623) 40.2 (1021) 20.3 (515.6), 18.8 0.0 (0.0)
(5) (477.5)
7014-T00 1795 (816) 24.5 (623) 40.2 (1021) 20.3 (515.6), 18.8 22 (559)
(6) (477.5)
7014-T42 2045 (930) 24.5 (623) 40.2 (1021) 20.3 (515.6), 18.8 18.4 (467.4)
(4) (477.5)
7014-T42 2045 (930) 24.5 (623) 40.2 (1021) 20.3 (515.6), 18.8 0.0 (0.0)
(5) (477.5)
7014-T42 2045 (930) 24.5 (623) 40.2 (1021) 20.3 (515.6), 18.8 27 (686)
(6) (477.5)

The following table shows the necessary floor-loading specifications for the T00 and
T42 racks when it is loaded.
Rack Floor loading
Raised kg/m2 Non-raised kg/m2 Raised lbs/ft2 Non-raised lbs/ft2
7014-T00 (4) 366.7 322.7 75 66
7014-T00 (5) 734.5 690.6 150.4 141.4
7014-T00 (6) 341 297 70 61
7014-T42 (4) 403 359 82.5 73.5
7014-T42 (5) 825 781 169 160
7014-T42 (6) 341.4 297.5 70 61

The following notes are for both of the preceding tables.


Notes:
1. For maximum weight of fully populated rack, units are lbs with kg in
parentheses.
2. For dimensions without covers, units are inches with mm in parentheses.
3. The weight distribution distance in all four directions is the area around the rack
perimeter (minus covers) necessary to distribute the weight beyond the
perimeter of the rack. Weight distribution areas cannot overlap with adjacent
computer equipment weight distribution areas. Units are inches with mm in
parentheses.
4. Weight distribution distance is 1/2 the service clearance values shown in the
figure plus cover thickness.
5. No left and right weight distribution distance.

Appendix D. Rack Specifications 137


6. Left and right weight distribution distance required for a 70 lbs/ft2 raised floor
loading objective.

Rack specifications
All racks used for N series storage system installation must conform to the
specifications in this section. Both the IBM 7014 (Model T00 and Model T42) and
the IBM 2101 Model N00 racks conform, but some other racks, including a few from
IBM do not.
v The rack or cabinet must meet the EIA Standard EIA-310-D for 19-inch racks.
The front rack opening must be 451 mm wide + 0.75 mm (17.75 in. + 0.03 in.),
and the rail-mounting holes must be 465 mm + 0.8 mm (18.3 in. + 0.03 in.) apart
on center (horizontal width between vertical columns of holes on the two
front-mounting flanges and on the two rear-mounting flanges). Rail-mounting
holes must be 7.1 mm + 0.1 mm (0.28 in. + 0.004 in.) in diameter.

571mm (22.50 in.)

Rear, No Door

203mm (8.0 in.)

Drawer Rail
494mm (19.45 in.) 719mm (28.31 in.)
Mounting Flanges

51mm (2.01 in.)


Front, No Door

451mm (17.76 in.)

494mm (19.45 in.)

Figure 7. Top view of non-IBM rack specifications dimensions

The vertical distance between mounting holes must consist of sets of 3 holes
spaced (from bottom to top) 15.9 mm (0.625 in.), 15.9 mm (0.625 in.), and 12.67
mm (0.5 in.) on center (making each 3-hole set of vertical hole spacing 44.45
mm (1.75 in.) apart on center).

138 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Figure 8. Rack specifications dimensions, top front view

Hole Diameter = 465 +/- 0.8mm


7.1 +/- 0.1mm Rack Mounting Holes Center-to-Center

450 +/- 0.75mm


Rack Front Opening

12.7mm 12.7mm

15.9mm 15.9mm
EIA Hole Spacing

15.9mm 15.9mm

12.7mm 12.7mm

15.9mm 15.9mm

15.9mm 15.9mm
6.75mm min 6.75mm min

Bottom Front of Rack

Figure 9. Rack specifications dimensions, bottom front view

Appendix D. Rack Specifications 139


v The rack or cabinet must be capable of supporting an average load of 15.9 kg
(35 lbs) of product weight per EIA unit.
For example, a 4-EIA drawer will have a maximum drawer weight of 63.6 kg (140
lbs).
v Only ac power drawers are supported in the rack or cabinet. It is strongly
recommended that you use a power distribution unit (PDU) that meets the same
specifications as IBM PDUs to supply rack power. Each Power Distribution Bus
installed in a rack requires a dedicated power line of 200 to 240 V ac and 30 A.
Rack or cabinet power distribution devices must meet the drawer power
requirements, as well as that of any additional products that will be connected to
the same power distribution device.
The rack or cabinet power receptacle (PDU, UPS or multi-outlet strip) must have
a compatible plug type for your drawer or device.

Note: Refer to the sales manual for 7014 or 2101 racks if you want to use PDUs
that are designed for 7014 or 2101 racks. The customer is responsible for
ensuring that the PDU is compatible with the rack or cabinet and assumes
responsibility for any and all agency certifications required.
v The rack or cabinet must be compatible with drawer mounting rails, including a
secure and snug fit of the rail-mounting pins and screws into the rack or cabinet
rail support hole.

Note: If the rack or cabinet has square holes, a plug-in hole adapter may be
required. The plug-in hole adapters are NOT part of the N series rail
mounting kit included with every N series machine.
The rails provided with the N series storage system have been designed and
tested to safely support the weight of your drawer or device. The rails also
provide rear tie-down brackets.
The front and rear mounting flanges in the rack or cabinet must be 719 mm (28.3
in.) apart and the internal width bounded by the mounting flanges at least 494
mm (19.45 in.), for the IBM rails to fit in your rack or cabinet (see figure, Top
View of non-IBM Rack Specifications Dimensions on page Figure 7 on page
138).
v The rack or cabinet must have stabilization feet or brackets installed both in the
front and rear of the rack, or have another means of preventing the rack or
cabinet from tipping while the drawer or device is installed or removed.
Examples of some acceptable alternatives: The rack or cabinet may be securely
bolted to the floor, ceiling or walls, or to adjacent racks or cabinets in a long and
heavy row of racks or cabinets. Refer to the Rack Installation Guide for the 7014
or 2101 and the individual drawer installation guides for additional information.
v There must be adequate front and rear service clearances (in and around the
rack or cabinet).
The rack or cabinet must have sufficient horizontal width clearance in the front
and rear to allow the drawer to be fully slid into the front and, if applicable, the
rear service access positions (typically this requires 914.4 mm (36 in.) clearance
in both the front and rear).
If present, front and rear doors must be able to open far enough to provide
unrestrained access for service or be easily removable. If doors must be
removed for service, it is the customer’s responsibility to remove them prior to
service.
v The rack or cabinet must provide adequate clearance around the rack drawer.

140 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


There must be adequate clearance around the drawer bezel so that it can be
opened and closed, according to the product specifications (refer to the 7014 or
2101 Rack Installation Guides and the individual drawer installation guides).
Front or rear doors must also maintain a minimum of 51 mm (2 in.) front, 203
mm (8 in.) rear, door-to-mounting flange clearance, and 494 mm (19.4 in.) front,
571 mm (22.5 in.) rear, side-to-side clearance for drawer bezels and cables (see
Figure 7 on page 138).
v The rack or cabinet must provide adequate front-to-back ventilation.
For optimum ventilation, it is recommended the rack or cabinet not have a front
door. If the rack or cabinet has doors, the doors must be fully perforated so that
there is proper front-to-back airflow to maintain the required drawer ambient inlet
temperature between 10 °C and 40 °C (50 °F and 104 °F), with an ideal 22 °C
(72 °F), inside the rack. The perforations must yield 34% minimum open area per
square inch.

General safety requirements for IBM products installed in a non-IBM


rack
v Any product or component that plugs into either an IBM Power Distribution Unit
(PDU) or main power (using a power cord), or uses any voltage over 42 V ac
must be Safety Certified by a Nationally Recognized Test Laboratory (NRTL) for
the country in which it will be installed.
Some of the items that require safety certification may include: the rack or
cabinet (if it contains electrical components integral to the rack or cabinet), fan
trays, PDU, uninterruptible power supplies (UPS), multi-outlet strips, or any other
products installed in the rack or cabinet that connect to hazardous voltage.
Examples of OSHA-approved NRTLs for the USA:
– UL
– ETL
– CSA (with CSA NRTL or CSA US mark)
Examples of approved NRTLs for Canada:
– UL (Ulc mark)
– ETL (ETLc mark)
– CSA
The European Union requires a CE mark and a Manufacturer’s Declaration of
Conformity (DOC).
Certified products should have the NRTL logos or marks somewhere on the
product or product label. However, proof of certification must be made available
to IBM upon request. Proof consists of such items as copies of the NRTL license
or certificate, a CB Certificate, a Letter of Authorization to apply the NRTL mark,
the first few pages of the NRTL certification report, Listing in an NRTL
publication, or a copy of the UL Yellow Card. Proof should contain the
manufacturer’s name, product type and model, standard to which it was certified,
the NRTL name or logo, the NRTL file number or license number, and a list of
any Conditions of Acceptance or Deviations. A Manufacturer’s Declaration is not
proof of certification by an NRTL.
v The rack or cabinet must meet all electrical and mechanical safety legal
requirements for the country in which it is installed.
The rack or cabinet must be free of exposed hazards (such as voltages over 60
V dc or 42 V ac, energy over 240 VA, sharp edges, mechanical pinch points, or
hot surfaces).

Appendix D. Rack Specifications 141


v There must be an accessible and unambiguous disconnect device for each
product in the rack, including any PDU.
A disconnect device may consist of either the plug on the power cord (if the
power cord is no longer than 6 feet), the inlet receptacle (if the power cord is of a
detachable type), or a power on/off switch, or an Emergency Power Off switch on
the rack, provided all power is removed from the rack or product by the
disconnect device.
If the rack or cabinet has electrical components (such as fan trays or lights), the
rack must have an accessible and unambiguous disconnect device.
v The rack or cabinet, PDU and Multi-Outlet Strips, and products installed in the
rack or cabinet must all be properly grounded to the customer facility ground.
There must be no more than 0.1 Ohms between the ground pin of the PDU or
rack plug and any touchable metal or conductive surface on the rack and on the
products installed in the rack. Grounding method must comply with applicable
country’s electric code (such as NEC or CEC). Ground continuity can be verified
by your IBM service personnel, after the installation is completed, and should be
verified prior to the first service activity.
v The voltage rating of the PDU and multi-outlet strips must be compatible with the
products plugged into them.
The current and power ratings for the PDU or multi-outlet strips must be at least
1.25 times the sum of the ratings of the products that will plug into it. The current
rating of the PDU or multi-outlet strip must be less than 0.80 of the rating for the
building supply circuit (as required by the NEC and CEC). Example: A PDU rating
of 12A for a 15A wall breaker, and sum of product ratings does not exceed 9.6A.
If a UPS is installed, it must meet all the above electrical safety requirements as
described for a PDU (including certification by an NRTL).
v The rack or cabinet, PDU, UPS, multi-outlet strips and all products in the rack or
cabinet must be installed according to the manufacturer’s instructions, and in
accordance with all national, state or province, and local codes and laws.
The rack or cabinet, PDU, UPS, multi-outlet strips and all products in the rack or
cabinet must be used as intended by the manufacturer (per manufacturer’s
product documentation and marketing literature).
v All documentation for use and installation of the rack or cabinet, PDU, UPS, and
all products in the rack or cabinet, including safety information, must be available
on-site.
v If there is more than one source of power in the rack or cabinet, there must be
clearly visible safety labels for ″Multiple Power Source″ (in the languages
required for the country in which the product is installed).
v If the rack or cabinet or any products installed in the cabinet had safety or weight
labels applied by the manufacturer, they must be intact and translated into the
languages required for the country in which the product is installed.
v If the rack or cabinet has doors, the rack becomes a fire enclosure by definition
and must meet the applicable flammability ratings (V-0 or better). Totally metal
enclosures at least 1 mm (0.04 in.) thick are considered to comply.
Nonenclosure (decorative) materials must have a flammability rating of V-1 or
better. If glass is used (such as in rack doors) it must be safety glass. If wood
shelves are used in the rack or cabinet, they must be treated with a UL Listed
flame-retardant coating.
v The rack or cabinet configuration must comply with all IBM requirements for ″safe
to service″ (contact your IBM Installation Planning Representative if in doubt).
There must be no unique maintenance procedures or tools required for service.

142 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Elevated service installations, where the products to be serviced are installed
between 1.5 m and 3.7 m (5 ft and 12 ft) above the floor, require the availability
of an OSHA- and CSA-approved nonconductive step ladder. If a ladder is
required for service, the customer must supply the OSHA- and CSA-approved
nonconductive step ladder (unless other arrangements have been made with the
local IBM Service Branch Office). Products installed over 2.9 m (12 ft) above the
floor require a Special Bid to be completed before they can be serviced by IBM
service personnel.
For products not intended for rack-mounting to be serviced by IBM, the products
and parts that will be replaced as part of that service must not weigh over 11.4
kg (25 lbs) (contact your Installation Planning Representative if in doubt).
There must not be any special education or training required for safe servicing of
any of the products installed in the racks (contact your Installation Planning
Representative if in doubt).
v Any rack or cabinet must have stabilization feet or brackets installed, or have
another means of preventing the rack or cabinet from tipping during product
operation or service.
Examples of some acceptable alternatives: The rack or cabinet may be securely
bolted to the floor, ceiling or walls, or to adjacent racks or cabinets in a long and
heavy row of racks or cabinets.
v It is strongly recommended that the mounting rails that are shipped with the
product be used to install it in the rack.
The mounting rails that ship with IBM products have been designed and tested to
safely support the product during operation and service activities. The mounting
rails used on products to be serviced by IBM must be certified for use with the
products by an NRTL to all applicable country safety standards.

Note: IBM requires that mounting rails must be able to support four times the
maximum rated product weight in its worst-case position (fully extended
front and rear positions) for 1 full minute without catastrophic failure.

Appendix D. Rack Specifications 143


144 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide
Appendix E. Optional adapter cards supported by the N3600
IBM supports the following optional PCIe adapter cards in the N3600.

Note: The N3300 does not support optional adapter cards.


Table 89. Optional adapter cards supported by the N3600
Feature Code Feature Code Description
1012 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical)
1013 Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper)
1014 Dual-port 4-Gbps FC HBA for disk attachment
1015 Dual-port 4-Gbps FC HBA for tape attachment
1021 Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical)
1024 Dual-port SCSI Ultra320 HBA for tape attachment
1026 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter (copper)
1029 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment

For the single-node models, the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceed one.
For the dual-node models, the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceed two.

For information about monitoring the LEDs for your optional adapter cards, refer to
the IBM System Storage N series Platform Monitoring Guide.

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012)


Feature code 1012 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-SX) adapter. This
adapter has two LC duplex connectors and supports a maximum distance of 275m
using 62.5-micron MMF media and 550m using 50-micron MMF media.

For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one.
For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two.

Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1013)


Feature code 1013 is a dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter. This adapter
supports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T Ethernet standards. This
adapter has two RJ-45 connectors and supports a maximum distance of 100m
using Category 5 or better unshielded twisted pair (UTP) four-pair media.

For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one.
For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two.

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014)
Feature code 1014 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA. This adapter
auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter may only be used for attaching
"back-end" storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000). The
Fibre Channel ports on this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports.

This adapter has two small form factor (SFF) multi-mode optics with LC-style
connectors. This adapter supports the following maximum cable lengths.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2008 145


Table 90. Dual-port 4 Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk (FC 1014) - maximum cable lengths
62.5 micron multi-mode
Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre fibre
1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters
2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters
4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters

For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one.
For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two.

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015)
Feature code 1015 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment.
This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps.

This adapter has two SFF multi-mode optics with LC-style connectors. This adapter
supports the following maximum cable lengths.
Table 91. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape (FC 1015) - maximum cable lengths
62.5 micron multi-mode
Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre fibre
1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters
2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters
4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters

For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one.
For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two.

This feature code includes a 50-micron optical loopback cable with LC connectors.

Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical) (FC 1021)


Feature code 1021 is a Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI PCIe TCP/IP offload engine (TOE)
adapter that provides two optical LC duplex connectors for connection to iSCSI
hosts.

For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one.
For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two.

Dual-port SCSI Ultra320 HBA for tape attachment (FC 1024)


Feature code 1024 is a SCSI Ultra320 dual-channel host bus adapter (HBA)
designed to support connection to a tape device. The adapter includes two 68-pin
VHDCI external connectors (Channel A and Channel B). Two SCSI LVD two-meter
cables (for connecting to the tape device) are included. These cables have 68-pin
VHDCI connectors on each end.

For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one.
For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two.

146 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1026)
Feature code 1026 is a gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target PCIe adapter that provides
two Ethernet iSCSI ports to be configured as target connections for iSCSI hosts.

For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one.
For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two.

Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1029)
Feature code 1029 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching disk expansion
units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000) to N series storage controllers. This
adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Four small form
factor (SFF) multimode optical ports with LC connectors support the following cable
lengths:
Table 92. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1029) - maximum
cable lengths
62.5 micron multi-mode
Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre fibre
1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters
2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters
4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters

The ports of this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports.

For a single-node model (2862-A10), the maximum number of this adapter is one.
For a dual-node model (2862-A20), the maximum number of this adapter is two.

Appendix E. Optional adapter cards supported by the N3600 147


148 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide
Appendix F. Optional adapter cards supported by N5200 and
N5500 systems
The N5200 and N5500 support a variety of optional adapter cards.
Table 93. Optional adapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500 models
Feature Code Feature Code Description
1003 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter (optical)
1004 Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment
1005 Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment
1006 Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (gateways and
MetroCluster filer configurations)
1007 Quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper)
1008 Single-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10 GbE) (optical)
1009 Quad-Port GbE TOE NIC (copper)
1010 Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper)
1011 Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical)
1016 SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel LVD tape adapter
1018 Dual-port MetroCluster VI Fibre Channel HBA (Models A20/G20 only)
1019 Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA
1020 Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper)
1027 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment
1034 SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA

The following is the priority order for installing optional adapter cards into the N5200
and N5500:
1. Fibre Channel host bus adapter (HBA) cards (FC 1004, 1005, 1006, 1018,
1019, 1027, and 1034)
2. Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapters (FC 1010 and 1011)
3. Ethernet Network Interface Cards (FC 1003, 1007, 1008, 1009, and 1020)
4. SCSI Dual-channel Ultra320 LVD adapter for tape attachment (FC 1016)

For information about monitoring the LEDs for your optional adapter cards, refer to
the IBM System Storage N Series Platform Monitoring Guide.

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter (optical) (FC 1003)


Feature code 1003 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet network interface card. The
adapter supports 10000BASE-SX network topologies. The adapter has two LC
duplex connectors and supports 50- micron and 62.5-micron multi-mode fibre
(MMF). The maximum cable distance is 550 meters using 50-micron MMF and 275
m using 62.5-micron MMF.

For single-node models (A10 and G10), the maximum number of this adapter is
three. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the maximum number of this adapter
is six.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2008 149


For single-node models (A10 and G10), the slot priority for this adapter is slots 3, 4
and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priority for this adapter is slots
1, 2 and 4.

Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1004)


Feature code 1004 is a dual-port 2-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA interface for disk
storage expansion unit (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000) attachment. FC 1004
is used on all models of the N5200 and N5500 filers (A10 and A20) for attaching
EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000 disk storage expansion units.

This adapter provides two 2-Gbps LC connectors that support 50-micron or


62.5-micron multi-mode fibre. The adapter auto-negotiates to 1 or 2 Gbps.

The maximum cable distances supported are:


Table 94. Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1004) - maximum cable
lengths
62.5 micron multi-mode
Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre fibre
1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters
2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters

For single-node models (A10), the maximum number of this adapter is three. For
dual-node models (A20), the maximum number of this adapter is six.

For single-node models (A10), the slot priority order for installing this adapter is
slots 2, 3 and 4. For dual-node models (A20), the slot priority order for installing this
adapter is slots 2, 1 and 4.

Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1005)


Feature code 1005 is a dual-port Fibre Channel HBA interface for tape connectivity.
This adapter is a 64-bit 133MHx 2 Gbps Fibre Channel adapter. It auto-negotiates
to 2 and 1 Gbps. The adapter has two LC style connectors and supports 50-micron
and 62.5-micron multi-mode fibre.

This adapter supports the following maximum cable lengths:


Table 95. Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1005) - maximum cable
lengths
62.5 micron multi-mode
Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre fibre
1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters
2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters

For single-node models (A10 and G10), the maximum number of this adapter is
three. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the maximum number of this adapter
is six.

For single-node models (A10 and G10) the slot priority order for this adapter is slots
4, 3 and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20) the slot priority order for this
adapter is slots 2, 1 and 4.

150 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (gateway and
MetroCluster filer) (FC 1006)
Feature code 1006 is a 2-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment. This
adapter provides two 2-Gbps LC connectors that support 50 micron or 62.5 micron
multi-mode fibre. The adapter auto-negotiates to 1 or 2 Gbps.

The maximum cable distances supported are:


Table 96. Dual-port Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (gateway and MetroCluster filer)
(FC 1006) - maximum cable lengths
62.5 micron multi-mode
Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre fibre
1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters
2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters

This adapter is used for two purposes:


v On N5200 and N5500 gateway models (G10 and G20), this adapter is used for
attaching N5200 or N5500 storage controllers directly to back-end disk systems
or to Fibre Channel switches, which are then connected to back-end disk
systems.
v In a fabric MetroCluster environment, this adapter is used for attaching dual-node
N5200 and N5500 filer models (A20) to the Fibre Channel switches that are used
in a fabric MetroCluster configuration. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, FC
1018 (Dual-port MetroCluster HBA) is also required.

For single-node models (G10) the maximum number of this adapter is three. For
dual-node models (A20 and G20) the maximum number of this adapter is six.

For single-node models (G10), the slot priority order for installing this adapter is 2, 3
and 4. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priority order for installing this
adapter is 2, 1, and 4.

Quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1007)


Feature code 1007 is a quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet network interface card.
This adapter supports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, and 1000BASE-T network
topologies. This adapter has four RJ-45 connectors and supports a maximum cable
distance of 100 meters using Category 5 or better 4-pair unshielded twisted pair
(UTP) media.

For single-node models (A10 and G10), the maximum number of this adapter is
two. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the maximum number of this adapter is
four.

For single-node models (A10 and G10), the slot priority order for this adapter is
slots 3, 4 and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priority order for this
adapter is slots 1, 2, and 4.

Appendix F. Optional adapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500 systems 151
Single-port 10-Gigabit Ethernet (10-GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1008)
Feature code 1008 is a single-port 10 GbE (10GBASE-SR) fibre short-range (SR)
PCI-X adapter with a single LC duplex connector. It supports a maximum distance
of 300 meters using 850-nanometer (nm) multi-mode fibre (MMF) media.

For single-node models (A10 and G10), the maximum number of this adapter is
two. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the maximum number of this adapter is
four.

For single-node models (A10 and G10), the slot priority order for this adapter is
slots 3, 4 and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priority order for this
adapter is slots 1, 2 and 4.

Quad-Port GbE TOE NIC (copper) (FC 1009)


Feature code 1009 is a four-port gigabit Ethernet network interface card that
provides full TCP/IP offload engine (TOE) capability and iSCSI acceleration. The
TOE function includes TCP and UDP checksum offload and large send offload. The
iSCSI acceleration includes header and data digest (CRC) generation and
verification.

This gigabit Ethernet (1000Base-T) PCI-X TOE feature provides four RJ-45
connectors. The maximum supported distance is 100 meters using Category 5, or
better, unshielded twisted pair (UTP) four-pair media.

For single-node models (A10 and G10), the maximum number of this adapter is
two. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the maximum number of this adapter is
four.

For single-node models (A10 and G10), the slot priority order for this adapter is
slots 3, 4 and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priority order for this
adapter is slots 1, 2 and 4.

Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1010)


Feature code 1010 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter. The
adapter has two copper RJ-45 connections.

For single-node models (A10 and G10), the maximum number of this adapter is
three. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the maximum number of this adapter
is six.

For single-node models (A10 and G10), the slot priority order for installing this
adapter is slots 3, 4 and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priority
order for installing this adapter is slots 1, 2 and 4.

Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical) (FC 1011)


Feature code 1011 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter. The adapter
has two optical LC duplex connectors.

For single-node models (A10 and G10), the maximum number of this adapter is
three. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the maximum number of this adapter
is six.

152 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


For single-node models (A10 and G10) the slot priority order for installing this
adapter is slots 3, 4 and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priority
order for installing this adapter is slots 1, 2 and 4.

SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel LVD Tape Adapter (FC 1016)


Feature code 1016 is a SCSI Ultra320 dual-channel LVD adapter. This adapter
contains two 68-pin VHDCI external connectors (Channel A and Channel B) and
two 68-pin VHDCI internal connectors (Channel A and Channel B). Customers are
only expected to use the two external connectors.

This feature code includes two SCSI LVD two-meter cables for attaching tape
devices to this SCSI HBA. Each cable has two 68-pin VHDCI connectors, one at
each end.

For single-node models (A10 and G10) the maximum number of this adapter is
three. For dual-node models (A20 and G20) the maximum number of this adapter is
six.

For single-node models (A10 and G10), the slot priority order for installing this
adapter is slots 4, 3, and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priority
order for installing this adapter is slots 2, 1 and 4.

Dual-port MetroCluster VI Fibre Channel HBA (Models A20/G20 only)


(FC 1018)
Feature code 1018 is used for fabric MetroCluster installations only. It is required by
MetroCluster. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, the MetroCluster Remote
advanced function authorization and IBM 2005-16B Fibre Channel switches are
required. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, the cluster interconnect traffic is
carried across the Fibre Channel SAN via this adapter instead of across the normal
Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables.

In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, two of these adapter cards must be ordered


(one for each node of a dual-node cluster).

This adapter must be installed in slot 2.

Note: This feature requires Data ONTAP Version 7.2.3 or later.

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1019)


Feature code 1019 is a PCI-X dual-port 4-Gbps HBA for FCP target ports. This
adapter may only be used to provide additional FCP target ports; it may not be
used to attach storage expansion units. FCP target ports are used by application
servers on a Fibre Channel storage area network (SAN) for performing I/O to LUNs
on the N5200 or N5500 using Fibre Channel Protocol (FCP). It auto-negotiates to
speeds of 1, 2, or 4 Gbps.

Two SFF multi-mode optical ports with LC connectors support the following cable
lengths.

Appendix F. Optional adapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500 systems 153
Table 97. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1019) - Maximum cable lengths
62.5 micron multi-mode
Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre fibre
1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters
2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters
4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters

For a single-node model (A10 and G10), the maximum number of this adapter is
two. For a dual-node model (A20 and G20), the maximum number of this adapter is
four.

For single-node models, the slot priority order for installing this adapter is slots 3, 4
and 2. For dual-node models, the slot priority order for installing this adapter is slots
1, 2 and 4.

Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1020)


Feature code 1020 is a 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter. It supports 10BASE-T,
100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T network topologies. The adapter provides two
RJ-45 connections and supports a maximum cable length of 100 meters using
Category 5 or better 4-pair unshielded twisted pair (UTP) media.

For single-node models (A10 and G10), the maximum number of this adapter is
three. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the maximum number of this adapter
is six.

For single-node models (A10 and G10), the slot priority order for installing this
adapter is slots 3, 4 and 2. For dual-node models (A20 and G20), the slot priority
order for installing this adapter is slots 1, 2 and 4.

Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for Disk (FC 1027)


Feature code 1027 is a quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel host bus adapter (HBA). It
auto-negotiates to 4, 2, and 1 Gbps. It may only be used for attaching storage
expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000 and EXN4000). The Fibre Channel ports on
this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports.

This adapter has four small form factor (SFP) multi-mode optics with LC style
connectors. It supports the following maximum cable lengths:
Table 98. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1027) - Maximum
cable lengths
62.5 micron multi-mode
Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre fibre
1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters
2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters
4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters

For single-node models (A10), the maximum number of this adapter is three. For
dual-node models (A20), the maximum number of this adapter is six.

154 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Since this adapter is a PCI-X adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied
by the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this
adapter is 4, 3, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 2, 1, 4.

SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1034)


Feature code 1034 is a 4-Gbps PCI-X card used to support SnapMirror over Fibre
Channel.

For single-node models, the maximum number of this adapter is two. For dual-node
models, the maximum number of this adapter is four.

Since this adapter is a PCI-X adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied
by the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this
adapter is 3 and 4. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1 and 4.

Note: This feature requires Data ONTAP 7.2.2 or later.

Appendix F. Optional adapter cards supported by N5200 and N5500 systems 155
156 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide
Appendix G. Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and
N5600 systems
IBM supports the following optional PCIe adapter cards in the N5300 and N5600.
Table 99. Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600
Feature Code Feature Code Description
1012 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter (optical)
1013 Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper)
1014 Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment
1015 Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment
1017 Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA
1021 Dual-port GbE iSCSI adapter (optical)
1022 Quad-port GbE Ethernet TOE adapter (copper)
1023 Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper)
1024 Dual-port Ultra320 SCSI HBA for tape attachment
1026 Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper)
1029 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment
1031 Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter
1032 Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (A20/G20 models only)
1033 SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA
1035 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment

The following is the priority order for installing optional adapter cards into the N5300
and N5600:
1. Fibre Channel host bus adapter (HBA) cards (FC 1014, 1015, 1017, 1029,
1032, 1033, and 1035)
2. Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI adapter cards (FC 1021 and 1026)
3. Ethernet Network Interface cards (FC 1012, 1013, 1022, 1023, and 1031)
4. Dual-port Ultra320 SCSI HBA for tape attachment (FC 1024)

For the single-node models, the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceed
three. For the dual-node models the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceed
six.

For information about monitoring the LEDs for your optional adapter cards, refer to
the IBM System Storage N Series Platform Monitoring Guide.

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012)


Feature code 1012 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-SX) adapter. This
adapter has two LC duplex connectors and supports a maximum distance of 275
meters using 62.5-micron MMF media and 550m using 50-micron MMF media.

For a single-node model (2868/2869-A10/G10), the maximum number of this


adapter is three. For a dual-node model (2868/2869-A20/G20), the maximum
number of this adapter is six.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2008 157


Since this adapter is a PCIe adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied by
the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this
adapter is 3, 4, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1, 2, 4.

Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1013)


Feature code 1013 is a dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter. This adapter
supports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T Ethernet standards. This
adapter has two RJ-45 connectors and supports a maximum distance of 100 meters
using Category 5 or better unshielded twisted pair (UTP) four-pair media.

For a single-node model (2868/2869-A10/G10), the maximum number of this


adapter is three. For a dual-node model (2868/2869-A20/G20), the maximum
number of this adapter is six.

Since this adapter is a PCIe adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied by
the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this
adapter is 3, 4, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1, 2, 4.

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014)
Feature code 1014 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA. This adapter
auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter may only be used for attaching
"back-end" storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000). The
Fibre Channel ports on this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports.

This adapter has two small form factor (SFF) multi-mode optics with LC-style
connectors. This adapter supports the following maximum cable lengths.
Table 100. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk (FC 1014) - maximum cable
lengths
62.5 micron multi-mode
Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre fibre
1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters
2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters
4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters

For a single-node model (2868/2869-A10/G10), the maximum number of this


adapter is three. For a dual-node model (2868/2869-A20/G20), the maximum
number of this adapter is six.

Since this adapter is a PCIe adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied by
the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this
adapter is 4, 3, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 2, 1, 4.

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015)
Feature code 1015 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment.
This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps.

This adapter has two SFF multi-mode optics with LC-style connectors. This adapter
supports the following maximum cable lengths.

158 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Table 101. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape (FC 1015) - maximum cable
lengths
62.5 micron multi-mode
Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre fibre
1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters
2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters
4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters

For a single-node model (2868/2869-A10/G10), the maximum number of this


adapter is three. For a dual-node model (2868/2869-A20/G20), the maximum
number of this adapter is six.

Since this adapter is a PCIe adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied by
the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this
adapter is 4, 3, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 2, 1, 4.

This feature code includes a 50-micron optical loopback cable with LC connectors.

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017)


Feature code 1017 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for FCP target ports.
This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter is used for providing
two additional 4-Gbps FCP target ports. It is not used for attaching storage
expansion units (EXN1000s, EXN2000s, and EXN4000s).

This adapter has two SFF multi-mode optics with LC-style connectors. This adapter
supports the following maximum cable lengths.
Table 102. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017) - maximum cable lengths
62.5 micron multi-mode
Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre fibre
1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters
2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters
4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters

For a single-node model (2868/2869-A10/G10), the maximum number of this


adapter is three. For a dual-node model (2868/2869-A20/G20), the maximum
number of this adapter is six.

Since this adapter is a PCIe adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied by
the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this
adapter is 4, 3, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 2, 1, 4.

Dual-port GbE iSCSI adapter (optical) (FC 1021)


Feature code 1021 is a dual-port Ethernet iSCSI adapter.

For single-node models (2868/2869-A10/G10), the maximum number of this adapter


is three. For dual-node models (2868/2869-A20/G20), the maximum number of this
adapter is six.

Appendix G. Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600 systems 159
Since this adapter is a PCIe adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied by
the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this
adapter is 3, 4, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1, 2, 4.

Quad-port GbE Ethernet TOE adapter (copper) (FC 1022)


Feature code 1022 is a quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet TOE adapter.

For single-node models (2868/2869-A10/G10), the maximum number of this adapter


is three. For dual-node models (2868/2869-A20/G20), the maximum number of this
adapter is six.

Since this adapter is a PCIe adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied by
the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this
adapter is 3, 4, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1, 2, 4.

Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1023)


Feature code 1023 is a quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter. This adapter
supports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T Ethernet standard. It has four
RJ-45 connectors and supports a maximum distance of 100 meters using Category
5 or better unshielded twisted pair (UTP) four-pair media.

For single-node models (2868/2869-A10/G10), the maximum number of this adapter


is three. For dual-node models (2868/2869-A20/G20), the maximum number of this
adapter is six.

Since this adapter is a PCIe adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied by
the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this
adapter is 3, 4, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1, 2, 4.

Dual-port Ultra320 SCSI HBA for tape attachment (FC 1024)


Feature code 1024 is a dual-port Ultra320 SCSI host bus adapter (HBA) for tape
attachment.

For single-node models (2868/2869-A10/G10), the maximum number of this adapter


is three. For dual-node models (2868/2869-A20/G20), the maximum number of this
adapter is six.

Since this adapter is a PCIe adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied by
the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this
adapter is 3, 4, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 2, 1, 4.

Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1026)


Feature code 1026 is a dual-port Ethernet iSCSI adapter.

For single-node models (2868/2869-A10/G10), the maximum number of this adapter


is three. For dual-node models (2868/2869-A20/G20), the maximum number of this
adapter is six.

Since this adapter is a PCIe adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied by
the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this
adapter is 3, 4, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1, 2, 4.

160 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1029)
Feature code 1029 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching disk expansion
units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000) to N series storage controllers. This
adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Four small form
factor (SFF) multimode optical ports with LC connectors support the following cable
lengths:
Table 103. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1029) - maximum
cable lengths
62.5 micron multi-mode
Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre fibre
1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters
2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters
4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters

The ports of this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports.

For the single-node model (2868/2869-A10) the maximum number of this adapter is
three. For the dual-node model (2868/2869-A20) the maximum number of this
adapter is six.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter. For a single-node configuration, the slot priority
order is 3, 4, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1, 2, 4.

Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter (FC 1031)


Feature code 1031 is a 10-Gb Ethernet PCIe TOE adapter feature that provides
dual LC duplex connectors. It supports a maximum distance of 300 meters using
850-nanometer (nm) multimode fiber (MMF) media.

For single-node models (2868/2869-A10/G10), the maximum number of this adapter


is three. For dual-node models (2868/2869-A20/G20), the maximum number of this
adapter is six.

Since this adapter is a PCIe adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied by
the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this
adapter is 3, 4, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1, 2, 4.

Note: This feature requires Data ONTAP 7.2.3 or later.

Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (Models A20/G20 only) (FC 1032)


Feature code 1032 is used for fabric MetroCluster installations only. It is required by
MetroCluster. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, the MetroCluster Remote
advanced function authorization and IBM 2005-16B Fibre Channel switches are
required. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, the cluster interconnect traffic is
carried across the Fibre Channel SAN via this adapter instead of across the normal
Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables.

In a fabric MetroCluster configuration (2868/2869-A20/G20), two of these adapter


cards must be ordered (one for each node of a dual-node cluster).

This adapter must be installed in slot 2.

Appendix G. Optional adapter cards supported by N5300 and N5600 systems 161
Note: This feature requires Data ONTAP 7.2.3 or later.

SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1033)


Feature code 1033 is a 4-Gbps PCIe card used to support SnapMirror over Fibre
Channel.

For single-node models, the maximum number of this adapter is two. For dual-node
models, the maximum number of this adapter is four.

Since this adapter is a PCIe adapter, it may be installed in any slot not occupied by
the NVRAM card. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this
adapter is 3 and 4. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1 and 4.

Note: This feature requires Data ONTAP 7.2.2 or later.

Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment
(FC 1035)
Feature code 1035 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching tape and disk
expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000) to N series storage
controllers. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps.
Four small form factor (SFF) multimode optical ports with LC connectors support
the following cable lengths:
Table 104. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment (FC 1035) -
maximum cable lengths
62.5 micron multi-mode
Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre fibre
1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters
2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters
4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters

The ports of this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports.

For the single-node model (2868/2869-A10) the maximum number of this adapter is
three. For the dual-node model (2868/2869-A20) the maximum number of this
adapter is six.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter. For a single-node configuration, the slot priority
order is 3, 4, 2. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 1, 2, 4.

162 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Appendix H. Optional adapter cards supported by N7000
series systems
IBM supports optional adapter cards in the N7000 series models. The N7700 and
N7900 support a variety of optional adapter cards. The optional adapter cards are
common across all N7000 series models.

The following is the priority order for installing optional adapter cards into the N7700
and N7900:
1. Fibre Channel host bus adapter (HBA) cards (FC 1014, 1015, 1017, 1029,
1032, 1033, 1034, 1035)
2. iSCSI target adapters (FC 1010 and 1011) and Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target
adapters (FC 1021 and 1026)
3. Ethernet network interface cards (FC 1008, 1009, 1012, 1013, 1022, 1023, and
1031)
4. SCSI Ultra320 dual-channel tape adapters (FC 1016 and 1024)

PCI-X Adapters
All N7000 models support the following PCI-X adapters.
Table 105. Optional PCI-X Adapters
Feature Code Feature Code Description
1008 Single-port 10 Gigabit Ethernet (10 GbE) TOE (optical)
1009 Quad-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) TOE (copper)
1010 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) iSCSI target adapter (copper)
1011 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) iSCSI target adapter (optical)
1016 SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel tape HBA
1034 SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (PCI-X)

For single-node models, the total number of PCI-X adapters (Feature codes 1008,
1009, 1010, 1011 and 1016) cannot exceed three. For dual-node models, the total
number of PCI-X adapters (Feature codes 1008, 1009, 1010, 1011 and 1016)
cannot exceed six. For dual-node models, adapters must be ordered and added in
pairs, one per node, so that both nodes are populated with the same number of
each type of adapters.

Single-port 10 GbE TOE adapter (FC 1008)


Feature code 1008 is a single-port 10 GbE (10GBASE-SR) fibre short-range (SR)
PCI-X adapter with a single LC duplex connector. This adapter supports a
maximum distance of 300 meters using 850 nanometer (nm) multi-mode fibre
(MMF) media.

For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is two. For a
dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four.

Since this adapter is a PCI-X adapter, it may only be installed in slots 3 or 9. The
slot priority order for this adapter is slot 9, 3. For technical reasons, this TOE
adapter is not permitted in slot 4.

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2008 163


Quad-port Gigabit Ethernet TOE adapter (FC 1009)
Feature code 1009 is a quad-port Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-T) adapter. The
adapter has four copper RJ-45 connections. This adapter supports a maximum
distance of 100 meters using Category 5 or better unshielded twisted pair (UTP)
four-pair media.

For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is two. For a
dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four.

Since this adapter is a PCI-X adapter, it may only be installed in slots 3 or 9. The
slot priority order for this adapter is slot 9, 3. For technical reasons, this TOE
adapter is not permitted in slot 4.

Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1010)


Feature code 1010 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter. The
adapter has two copper RJ-45 connections.

For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is three. For a
dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is six.

Since this adapter is a PCI-X adapter, it may only be installed in slots 3, 4 or 9. The
slot priority order for this adapter is 3, 4, 9.

Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical) (FC 1011)


Feature code 1011 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter. The adapter
has two optical LC duplex connectors.

For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is three. For a
dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is six.

Since this adapter is a PCI-X adapter, it may only be installed in slots 3, 4 or 9. The
slot priority order for this adapter is 3, 4, 9.

SCSI Ultra320 Dual-Channel LVD tape adapter (FC 1016)


Feature code 1016 is a SCSI Ultra320 dual-channel LVD adapter. This adapter
contains two 68-pin VHDCI external connectors (Channel A and Channel B) and
two 68-pin VHDCI internal connectors (Channel A and Channel B). Customers are
only expected to use the two external connectors.

This feature code includes two SCSI LVD two-meter cables for attaching tape
devices to this SCSI HBA. Each cable has two 68-pin VHDCI connectors, one at
each end.

For the single-node models the maximum number of this adapter is three. For the
dual-node models the maximum number of this adapter is six.

Since this adapter is a PCI-X adapter, it may only be installed in slots 3, 4 or 9. The
slot priority order for this adapter is 4, 9, 3.

SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1034)


Feature code 1034 is a 4-Gbps PCI-X card used to support SnapMirror over Fibre
Channel.

164 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


For single-node models, the maximum number of this adapter is two. For dual-node
models, the maximum number of this adapter is four.

Since this adapter is a PCI-X adapter, it may only be installed in slots 3, 4 or 9. The
slot priority order for this adapter is 3, 4, 9.

Note: This feature requires Data ONTAP 7.2.2 or later.

PCI-Express (PCIe) adapters


N7000 series models support the following PCIe adapters.
Table 106. Optional PCIe adapters
Feature Code Feature Code Description
1012 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet adapter (optical)
1013 Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper)
1014 Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment
1015 Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment
1017 Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA
1021 Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical)
1022 Quad-port GbE Ethernet TOE adapter (copper)
1023 Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper)
1024 Dual-port SCSI Ultra320 HBA for tape attachment
1026 Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter (copper)
1029 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment
1031 Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter
1032 Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (A20/G20 models only)
1033 SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (PCIe)
1035 Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment

For the single-node models, the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceed five.
For the dual-node models, the total number of PCIe adapters cannot exceed ten.

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) adapter (optical) (FC 1012)


Feature code 1012 is a dual-port Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-SX) adapter. This
adapter has two LC duplex connectors and supports a maximum distance of 275m
using 62.5-micron MMF media and 550 meters using 50-micron MMF media.

For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is five. For a
dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is ten.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7,


and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6,
7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.

Dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1013)


Feature code 1013 is a dual-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet adapter. This adapter
supports 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T Ethernet standards. This

Appendix H. Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems 165


adapter has two RJ-45 connectors and supports a maximum distance of 100 meters
using Category 5 or better UTP four-pair media.

For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is five. For a
dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is ten.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7,


and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6,
7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1014)
Feature code 1014 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA. This adapter
auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter may only be used for attaching
"back-end" storage expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000). The
Fibre Channel ports on this adapter may NOT be used as FCP target ports.

This adapter has two small form factor (SFF) multi-mode optics with LC-style
connectors. This adapter supports the following maximum cable lengths.
Table 107. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk (FC 1014) - maximum cable
lengths
62.5 micron multi-mode
Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre fibre
1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters
2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters
4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters

For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is four. For a
dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is eight.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7,


and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6,
7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment (FC 1015)
Feature code 1015 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape attachment.
This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps.

This adapter has two SFF multi-mode optics with LC-style connectors. This adapter
supports the following maximum cable lengths.
Table 108. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape (FC 1015) - maximum cable
lengths
62.5 micron multi-mode
Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre fibre
1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters
2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters
4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters

For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is three. For a
dual-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is six.

166 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7,
and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6,
7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.

This feature code will include a 50-micron optical loopback cable with LC
connectors.

Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017)


Feature code 1017 is a dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for FCP target ports.
This adapter auto-negotiates to 4, 2 and 1 Gbps. This adapter is used for providing
two additional 4-Gbps FCP target ports. It is not used for attaching storage
expansion units.

This adapter has two SFF multi-mode optics with LC-style connectors. This adapter
supports the following maximum cable lengths.
Table 109. Dual-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel target HBA (FC 1017) - maximum cable lengths
62.5 micron multi-mode
Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre fibre
1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters
2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters
4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters

For the single-node model the maximum number of this adapter is four. For the
dual-node model the maximum number of this adapter is eight.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7,


and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6,
7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.

Dual-port GbE iSCSI target adapter (optical) (FC 1021)


Feature code 1021 is a Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI PCIe TCP/IP offload engine (TOE)
adapter that provides two optical LC duplex connectors for connection to iSCSI
hosts.

For single-node models (2866/2867-A11/G11), the maximum number of this adapter


is five. For dual-node models (2866/2867-A21/G21), the maximum number of this
adapter is ten.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7,


and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6,
7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.

Quad-port GbE Ethernet TOE adapter (copper) (FC 1022)


Feature code 1022 is a quad-port 10/100/1000 Ethernet TOE adapter.

For single-node models, the maximum number of this adapter is three. For
dual-node models, the maximum number of this adapter is six.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7,


and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6,
7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.

Appendix H. Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems 167


Quad-port GbE Ethernet adapter (copper) (FC 1023)
Feature code 1023 is a 10/100/1000 Ethernet (10Base-T, 100Base-TX, and
1000Base-T) PCIe feature that provides four RJ-45 connectors. The maximum
supported distance is 100 meters using Category 5, or better, unshielded twisted
pair (UTP) four-pair media.

For the single-node model the maximum number of this adapter is five. For the
dual-node model the maximum number of this adapter is ten.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7,


and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6,
7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.

Dual-port SCSI Ultra320 HBA for tape attachment (FC 1024)


Feature code 1024 is a SCSI Ultra320 dual-channel host bus adapter (HBA)
designed to support connection to a tape device. The adapter includes two 68-pin
VHDCI external connectors (Channel A and Channel B). Two SCSI LVD two-meter
cables (for connecting to the tape device) are included. These cables have 68-pin
VHDCI connectors on each end.

For a single-node model, the maximum number of this adapter is three. For a
dual-node model the maximum number of this adapter is six.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7,


and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6,
7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.

Dual-port Gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target adapter (copper) (FC 1026)


Feature code 1026 is a gigabit Ethernet iSCSI target PCIe adapter that provides
two Ethernet iSCSI ports to be configured as target connections for iSCSI hosts.

For the single-node mode the maximum number of this adapter is five. For the
dual-node model the maximum number of this adapter is ten.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7,


and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6,
7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.

Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1029)
Feature code 1029 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching disk expansion
units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000) to N series storage controllers. This
adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps. Four small form
factor (SFF) multimode optical ports with LC connectors support the following cable
lengths:
Table 110. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for disk attachment (FC 1029) - maximum
cable lengths
62.5 micron multi-mode
Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre fibre
1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters
2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters
4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters

168 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


The ports of this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports.

For the single-node model (A11) the maximum number of this adapter is five. For
the dual-node model (A21) the maximum number of this adapter is ten.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7,


and 8. For a single-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For a
dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.

Dual-port 10 GbE Ethernet adapter (FC 1031)


Feature code 1031 is a 10-Gb Ethernet PCIe TOE adapter feature that provides
dual LC duplex connectors. It supports a maximum distance of 300 meters using
850-nanometer (nm) multimode fiber (MMF) media.

For the single-node model the maximum number of this adapter is five. For the
dual-node model the maximum number of this adapter is ten.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7,


and 8. For a single node configuration, the slot priority order for this adapter is 5, 6,
7, 8, 1. For a dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.

Note: This feature requires Data ONTAP 7.2.3 or later.

Dual-port MetroCluster VI HBA (Models A20/G20 only) (FC 1032)


Feature code 1032 is used for fabric MetroCluster installations only. It is required by
MetroCluster. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, the MetroCluster Remote
advanced function authorization and IBM 2005-16B Fibre Channel switches are
required. In a fabric MetroCluster configuration, the cluster interconnect traffic is
carried across the Fibre Channel SAN via this adapter instead of across the normal
Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables.

In a fabric MetroCluster configuration (A21/G21), two of these adapter cards must


be ordered (one for each node of a dual-node cluster).

This adapter must be installed in slot 1.

Note: This feature requires Data ONTAP 7.2.3 or later.

SnapMirror over Fibre Channel HBA (FC 1033)


Feature code 1033 is a 4-Gbps PCIe card used to support SnapMirror over Fibre
Channel.

For single-node models, the maximum number of this adapter is two. For dual-node
models, the maximum number of this adapter is four.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8.
For a single-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8. For a dual-node
configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8.

Note: This feature requires Data ONTAP 7.2.2 or later.

Appendix H. Optional adapter cards supported by N7000 series systems 169


Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment
(FC 1035)
Feature code 1035 is a PCIe quad-port 4-Gbps HBA for attaching tape and disk
expansion units (EXN1000, EXN2000, and EXN4000) to N series storage
controllers. This adapter auto-negotiates connections of 1-Gbps, 2-Gbps, or 4-Gbps.
Four small form factor (SFF) multimode optical ports with LC connectors support
the following cable lengths:
Table 111. Quad-port 4-Gbps Fibre Channel HBA for tape and disk attachment (FC 1035) -
maximum cable lengths
62.5 micron multi-mode
Link operating speed 50 micron multi-mode fibre fibre
1 Gbps 500 meters 300 meters
2 Gbps 300 meters 150 meters
4 Gbps 150 meters 70 meters

The ports of this adapter may not be used as FCP target ports.

For the single-node model (2866/2867-A11) the maximum number of this adapter is
five. For the dual-node model (2866/2867-A21) the maximum number of this
adapter is ten.

This adapter is a PCIe adapter and it may only be installed in slots 1, 2, 5, 6, 7,


and 8. For a single-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 1. For a
dual-node configuration, the slot priority order is 5, 6, 7, 8, 2.

170 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Appendix I. IBM System Storage N series documentation
The following lists present an overview of the IBM System Storage N series
hardware and Data ONTAP product libraries, as well as other related documents.

You can access the documents listed in these tables at the following Web site:

www.ibm.com/storage/support/nas/

N7000 series systems library


v IBM System Storage N7000 Series Hardware and Service Guide, GC26-7953
v IBM System Storage N7000 Series Filer Installation and Setup Instructions,
GC26-7954
v IBM System Storage N7000 Series Gateway Installation and Setup Instructions,
GC26-7956

N5000 series systems library


v IBM System Storage N5000 Series Hardware and Service Guide, GC26-7785
v IBM System Storage N5000 Series Filer Installation and Setup Instructions,
GC26-7784
v IBM System Storage N5000 Series Gateway Installation and Setup Instructions,
GC26-7838

N3300 and N3600 storage systems library


v IBM System Storage N3300 and N3600 Hardware and Service Guide,
GC27-2087
v IBM System Storage N3300 Installation and Setup Instructions, GC27-2086
v IBM System Storage N3600 Installation and Setup Instructions, GC27-2089

N3700 storage system library


v IBM System Storage N3700 Hardware and Service Guide, GA32-0515
v IBM System Storage N3700 Installation and Setup Instructions, GA32-0517

EXN1000, EXN2000 and EXN4000 expansion units library


v IBM System Storage EXN1000 Storage Expansion Unit Hardware and Service
Guide, GC26-7802
v IBM System Storage EXN1000 Installation and Setup Instructions, GC26-7786
v IBM System Storage EXN2000 Storage Expansion Unit Hardware and Service
Guide, GA32-0516
v IBM System Storage EXN2000 Installation and Setup Instructions, GC27-2064
v IBM System Storage EXN4000 Storage Expansion Unit Hardware and Service
Guide, GC27-2080
v IBM System Storage EXN4000 Installation and Setup Instructions, GC27-2079

Data ONTAP 7.2 filer library


v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2.x Release Notes, GC26-7963

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2008 171


v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Active/Active Configuration
Guide, GC26-7964
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 File Access and Protocols
Management Guide, GC26-7965
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Storage Management Guide,
GC26-7966
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Data Protection Online Backup
and Recovery Guide, GC26-7967
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Data Protection Tape Backup and
Recovery Guide, GC26-7968
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 MultiStore Management Guide,
GC26-7969
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Network Management Guide,
GC26-7970
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Commands: Manual Page
Reference, Volume 1, GC26-7971
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Commands: Manual Page
Reference, Volume 2, GC26-7972
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Upgrade Guide, GC26-7976
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Block Access Management Guide
for iSCSI & FCP, GC26-7973
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 System Administration Guide,
GC26-7974
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Software Setup Guide,
GC26-7975
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Core Commands Quick
Reference, GC26-7977

Data ONTAP 7.1 filer library


v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1.x Release Notes, GC26-7862
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Cluster Installation and
Management Guide, GC26-7790
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 File Access and Protocols
Management Guide, GA32-0520
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Storage Management Guide,
GA32-0521
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Data Protection Online Backup
and Recovery Guide, GA32-0522
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Data Protection Tape Backup and
Recovery Guide, GA32-0523
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 MultiStore Management Guide,
GA32-0524
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Network Management Guide,
GA32-0525
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Commands: Manual Page
Reference, Volume 1, GA32-0526
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Commands: Manual Page
Reference, Volume 2, GA32-0527
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Upgrade Guide, GC26-7791

172 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Block Access Management Guide
for iSCSI and FCP, GA32-0528
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 System Administration Guide,
GA32-0529
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Software Setup Guide,
GA32-0530
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.1 Core Commands Quick
Reference, GA32-0531

Data ONTAP 7.2 gateway systems library


v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2.x Gateway Release Notes,
GC26-7955
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Gateway Software Setup,
Installation, and Management Guide, GC26-7962
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Gateway Connecting Your
System, GC26-7990
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Gateway Planning Guide,
GC26-7957
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Gateway Upgrade Guide,
GC26-7958
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Gateway Installation
Requirements, Quick Start, and Reference Guide, GC27-2092
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Gateway Metrocluster Guide,
GC27-2091
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Gateway Implementation Guide
for IBM Storage, GC26-7959
v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Data ONTAP 7.2 Implementation Guide
for IBM SAN Volume Controller Storage, GC27-2061
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Gateway Implementation Guide
for Hitachi Storage, GC26-7960
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Gateway Implementation Guide
for HP XP Storage, GC26-7961
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Gateway Implementation Guide
for HP EVA, GC27-2093
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Gateway Implementation Guide
for EMC CLARiiON Storage, GC27-2081
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Gateway Implementation Guide
for EMC Symmetrix Storage, GC27-2094
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Gateway Implementation Guide
for 3PAR Storage, GC27-2090
v IBM System Storage N series Data ONTAP 7.2 Gateway Implementation Guide
for Fujitsu ETERNUS Storage, GC27-2082

Data ONTAP 7.1 gateway systems library


v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Planning Guide, GC26-7839
v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Integration Guide for IBM Storage,
GC26-7840
v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Integration Guide for Hitachi Storage,
GC26-7841

Appendix I. IBM System Storage N series documentation 173


v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Integration Guide for HP Storage,
GC26-7858
v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Software Upgrade Guide, GC26-7859
v IBM System Storage N series Gateway Software Setup, Installation, and
Management Guide, GC26-7886
v IBM System Storage N series Gateway 7.1.x Release Notes, GC26-7837

Other N series and N series-related documents


v IBM System Storage N Series Platform Monitoring Guide, GC27-2088 (previously
called the IBM System Storage N series Error Messages and Troubleshooting
Guide, GC26-7984)
v IBM System Storage N series Diagnostics Guide, GC26-7789
v IBM System Storage N series Introduction and Planning Guide, GA32-0543
v IBM System Storage N series AutoSupport Overview, GC26-7854
v IBM System Storage N series: Changing the cluster cfmode Setting in Fibre
Channel SAN Configurations, GC26-7876
v IBM System Storage N series Fibre Channel and iSCSI Configuration Guide,
SG24-7496
v IBM System Storage N series MetroCluster Redbook, REDP-4243-00
v IBM System Storage Systems Safety Notices, G229-9054
v IBM Storage Solution Rack 2101 Rack Installation and Service Guide: Models
200 and N00, GC26-7993

174 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Notices
This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A.

IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in
other countries. Consult your local IBM representative for information on the
products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to an IBM
product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM
product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product,
program, or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be
used instead. However, it is the user’s responsibility to evaluate and verify the
operation of any non-IBM product, program, or service.

IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter
described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any
license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:

IBM Director of Licensing


IBM Corporation
North Castle Drive
Armonk, NY 10504-1785
U.S.A.

The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other
country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS
PUBLICATIONS “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or
implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to
you.

This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.


Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be
incorporated in new editions of the publications. IBM may make improvements
and/or changes in the product(s) and/or program(s) described in this publication at
any time without notice.

Any references in this information to non-IBM Web sites are provided for
convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those
Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this
IBM product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk.

IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes
appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.

Attention: In compliance with the GNU General Public License (GPL), Version 2,
June 1991, a complete machine-readable copy of the source code for the relevant
source code portions of the Remote LAN Module (RLM) Firmware that are covered
by the GPL, is available from http://now.netapp.com.

Copyrights
Copyright © 2005–2008 IBM Corporation. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.
© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2008 175
References in this documentation to IBM products, programs, or services do not
imply that IBM intends to make these available in all countries in which IBM
operates. Any reference to an IBM product, program or service is not intended to
state or imply that only IBM’s product, program or service may be used. Any
functionally equivalent product, program or service that does not infringe any of
IBM’s intellectual property rights may be used instead of the IBM product, program
or service. Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other
products, except those expressly designated by IBM, are the user’s responsibility.

Trademarks
The following terms are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation
in the United States, other countries, or both:

IBM System i
IBM logo System p
AIX System Storage
Eserver System x
RS/6000 System z
Tivoli

NetApp, the Network Appliance logo, the bolt design, NetApp–the Network
Appliance Company, Data ONTAP, DataFabric, FAServer, FilerView, gFiler,
MultiStore, NearStore, NetCache, SecureShare, SnapManager, SnapMirror,
SnapMover, SnapRestore, SnapVault, SyncMirror, and WAFL are registered
trademarks of Network Appliance, Inc. in the United States, and/or other countries.
gFiler, Network Appliance, SnapCopy, SnapLock, Snapshot, and The Evolution of
Storage are trademarks of Network Appliance, Inc. in the United States and/or other
countries and registered trademarks in some other countries. ApplianceWatch,
BareMetal, Camera-to-Viewer, ComplianceClock, ComplianceJournal,
ContentDirector, ContentFabric, EdgeFiler, FlexClone, FlexVol, FPolicy, HyperSAN,
InfoFabric, LockVault, Manage ONTAP, NOW, NOW NetApp on the Web, ONTAPI,
RAID-DP, RoboCache, RoboFiler, SecureAdmin, Serving Data by Design,
SharedStorage, Simulate ONTAP, Smart SAN, SnapCache, SnapDirector,
SnapDrive, SnapFilter, SnapMigrator, SnapSuite, SnapValidator, SohoFiler, vFiler,
VFM, Virtual File Manager, VPolicy, and Web Filer are trademarks of Network
Appliance, Inc. in the United States and other countries. NetApp Availability
Assurance and NetApp ProTech Expert are service marks of Network Appliance,
Inc. in the United States.

Network Appliance is a licensee of the CompactFlash and CF Logo trademarks.

Intel and Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its
subsidiaries in the United States and other countries.

Linux is a trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other countries, or both.

Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT® are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in


the United States, other countries, or both.

UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other
countries.

All other brands or products are trademarks or registered trademarks of their


respective holders and should be treated as such.

176 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Electronic emission notices
The following statements apply to this product. The statements for other products
intended for use with this product will appear in their accompanying manuals.

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Class A Statement


Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause
harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the
interference at his own expense.

Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to
meet FCC emission limits. IBM is not responsible for any radio or television
interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by
unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or
modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.

Industry Canada Class A Emission Compliance Statement


This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Avis de conformité à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada


Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conform à la norme NMB-003 du
Canada.

European Union (EU) Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive


This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council
Directive 89/336/EEC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States
relating to electromagnetic compatibility. IBM cannot accept responsibility for any
failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a non-recommended
modification of the product, including the fitting of non-IBM option cards.

This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for Class A
Information Technology Equipment according to European Standard EN 55022. The
limits for Class A equipment were derived for commercial and industrial
environments to provide reasonable protection against interference with licensed
communication equipment.

Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may


cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate
measures.

Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to
reduce the potential for causing interference to radio and TV communications and
to other electrical or electronic equipment. Such cables and connectors are

Notices 177
available from IBM authorized dealers. IBM cannot accept responsibility for any
interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors.

European Community contact:


IBM Technical Regulations
Pascalstr. 100, Stuttgart, Germany 70569
Tele: 0049 (0)711 7851176
Fax: 0049 (0)711 785 1283
e-mail: tjahn@de.ibm.com

Australia and New Zealand Class A statement


Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may
cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate
measures.

Germany Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive


Deutschsprachiger EU Hinweis:

Hinweis für Geräte der Klasse A EU-Richtlinie zur Elektromagnetischen


Verträglichkeit

Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG


zur Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit
in den EU-Mitgliedsstaaten und hält die Grenzwerte der EN 55022 Klasse A ein.

Um dieses sicherzustellen, sind die Geräte wie in den Handbüchern beschrieben zu


installieren und zu betreiben. Des Weiteren dürfen auch nur von der IBM
empfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden. IBM übernimmt keine Verantwortung für
die Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen, wenn das Produkt ohne Zustimmung der
IBM verändert bzw. wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern ohne
Empfehlung der IBM gesteckt/eingebaut werden.

EN 55022 Klasse A Geräte müssen mit folgendem Warnhinweis versehen werden:

"Warnung: Dieses ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A. Diese Einrichtung kann im
Wohnbereich Funk-Störungen verursachen; in diesem Fall kann vom Betreiber
verlangt werden, angemessene Mabnahmen zu ergreifen und dafür aufzukommen."

Deutschland: Einhaltung des Gesetzes über die elektromagnetische


Verträglichkeit von Geräten

Dieses Produkt entspricht dem "Gesetz über die elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit


von Geräten (EMVG)." Dies ist die Umsetzung der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG in
der Bundesrepublik Deutschland.

Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz über die


elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit von Geräten (EMVG) (bzw. der EMC EG
Richtlinie 2004/108/EG) für Geräte der Klasse A

Dieses Gerät ist berechtigt, in übereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das
EG-Konformitätszeichen - CE - zu führen.

Verantwortlich für die Konformitätserklärung des EMVG ist die IBM Deutschland
GmbH, 70548 Stuttgart.

178 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Generelle Informationen:

Das Gerät erfüllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022


Klasse A.

People’s Republic of China Class A Electronic Emission Statement

Taiwan Class A warning statement

Japan VCCI Class A ITE Electronic Emission Statement

Korean Class A Electronic Emission Statement

Notices 179
180 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide
Index
Numerics configuration limits (continued)
iSCSI 63
2101 Model N00 133
N3300 storage system
7014 model T00 rack 134
active/active 68
7014 model T42 rack 135
single-controller 67
N3600 storage system
active/active 68
A single-controller 67
about this document N3700 storage system
how to send your comments xxvii active/active 69
AC power line sizes 121 single-controller 69
active/active configurations 4 N5200 storage system
adapter support 3 active/active 66
adapters single-controller 65
optional cards N5300 storage system
N3600 145 active/active 66
N5200 and N5500 149 single-controller 65
N5300 and N5600 157 N5500 storage system
N7700 and N7900 163 active/active 66
address, IBM xxvii single-controller 65
Advanced Single Instance Storage 76 N5600 storage system
attention notice xiii active/active 66
audience xxiii single-controller 65
AutoSupport 119 N7700 storage system
active/active 66
single-controller 65
C N7900 storage system
cables active/active 66
labeling 114 single-controller 65
measuring 114 connections
planning 113 expansion unit to N series filers 116
caution notices xiii expansion unit to other expansion units 116
definition xiii expansion units to an N series storage system 115
examples xiii gateway to external storage 23, 31, 38, 46, 53, 61,
CFO 76 116
CIFS protocol 75 conventions
Class A electronic emission notice 177 command xxvi
clearance dimensions 105 formatting xxvi
EXN1000 expansion unit 103 keyboard xxvii
N3300 storage system 87
N3600 storage system 87
N3700 storage system 96 D
N5200 storage system 98 danger notices xi
N5300 storage system 98 definition xi
N5500 storage system 98 example xi
N5600 storage system 98 Data ONTAP 3, 75
N7700 storage system 101 Data ONTAP 7.1 filer
N7900 storage system 101 documentation 172
clustering 4 Data ONTAP 7.1 gateway systems library 173
Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables 113 Data ONTAP 7.2 filer
N3700 system setup worksheet 130 documentation 171
comments, how to send xxvii Data ONTAP 7.2 gateway systems library 173
configuration limits device carrier xxvi
Fibre Channel 63 disk sanitization 76
host operating system configuration limits for Fibre documentation
Channel 65 Data ONTAP 7.1 filer 172
host operating system configuration limits for Data ONTAP 7.1 gateway 173
iSCSI 65 Data ONTAP 7.2 filer 171

© Copyright IBM Corp. 2005, 2008 181


documentation (continued) EXN1000, EXN2000 and EXN4000 expansion units
Data ONTAP 7.2 gateway 173 library 171
EXN1000, EXN2000 and EXN4000 expansion EXN2000 expansion unit
units 171 hardware features 71
IBM System Storage N series 170 hardware specifications 105
N series-related documents 174 mixing 2
N3300 and N3600 storage system 171 power cords 123
N3700 storage system 171 support 2
N5000 series systems 171 EXN4000 expansion unit
N7000 series systems 171 hardware features 72
hardware specifications 105
mixing 2
E power cords 123
electrical requirements support 2
EXN1000 expansion unit 104 expansion unit cabling
EXN2000 expansion unit 106 differences between early and current N3700 CPU
EXN4000 expansion unit 106 module designs 15
N3300 storage system 88 expansion units
N3600 storage system 88 cabling requirements (filers only) 116
N3700 storage system 97 connecting to an N series storage system 115
N5200 storage system 99 connecting to N series filers 116
N5300 storage system 99 connecting to other expansion units 116
N5500 storage system 100 connecting to the N3700 15
N5600 storage system 100 connecting to the N5200 filer 19
N7700 storage system 102 connecting to the N5300 filer 27
N7900 storage system 103 connecting to the N5500 filer 34
Electronic emission notices connecting to the N5600 filer 41
Australia and New Zealand Class A statement 178 connecting to the N7700 filer 49
European Union EMC Directive conformance connecting to the N7900 filer 57
statement 177 mixing 2
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) support 2
statement 177
Industry Canada Class A emission compliance
statement 177 F
Japanese Voluntary Control Council for Interference FCC Class A notice 177
(VCCI) statement 179 FCP protocol 75
Korean Class A warning statement 179 features
Taiwanese Class A warning statement 179 EXN1000
environmental hardware 70
notices xi EXN2000
environmental requirements hardware 71
EXN1000 expansion unit 103 EXN4000
EXN2000 expansion unit 105 hardware 73
EXN4000 expansion unit 105 host software 83
N3300 storage system 88 N3300 storage system
N3600 storage system 88 hardware 7, 10
N3700 storage system 96 N3600 storage system
N5200 storage system 98 hardware 10, 13
N5300 storage system 98 N3700 storage system
N5500 storage system 98 hardware 13, 17
N5600 storage system 98 N5200 filer
N7700 storage system 102 hardware 17, 20
N7900 storage system 102 N5200 gateway
Ethernet adapter support 3 hardware 22, 24
EXN1000 expansion unit N5300 filer
hardware features 70 hardware 25, 28
hardware specifications 103 N5300 gateway
mixing 2 hardware 29, 31
power cords 123 N5500 filer
support 2 hardware 32, 35

182 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


features (continued) host software features 83
N5500 gateway how to send your comments xxvii
hardware 36, 38
N5600 filer
hardware 39, 43 I
N5600 gateway IBM
hardware 44, 46 address xxvii
N7700 filer IBM safety information 174
hardware 47, 50 Infiniband (IB) cluster interconnect cables 113
N7700 gateway input power considerations 108
hardware 52, 53 inspection, safety xv
N7900 filer installation
hardware 55, 58 rack xv
N7900 gateway interoperability 3
hardware 60, 62 iSCSI configuration limits 63
power cords 123 iSCSI protocol 75, 76
software 79
support xxiii
Fibre Channel configuration limits 63 L
Fibre Channel expansion adapters labels, safety xii
descriptions 163 laser safety xiv
filer, defined xxvi load board, N3700 14
FilerView 75 LockVault Compliance 76
fire suppression xxii LockVault Enterprise 77
FlexClone 76
FlexVol 75
floor loading, T00 rack 137
floor loading, T42 rack 137
M
MetroCluster 77
floor plan considerations 110
Microsoft Exchange Bundle 77
floor-loading specifications 110
MultiStore 77
form, reader comment xxvii
FRU/CRU list
feature codes 123
N
N series
G related documents 174
N series documentation 170
gateway
N series storage system software 75
connecting to external storage 23, 31, 38, 46, 53,
N00 rack specifications 133
61, 116
N3300 and N3600 storage system library 171
gateway, defined xxvi
N3300 storage system
general considerations 108
active/active
configuration limits 68
clearance dimensions 87
H electrical requirements 88
hardware service and support xxv environmental requirements 88
hardware specifications features
EXN1000 expansion unit 103 hardware 7
EXN2000 expansion unit 105 hardware specifications 87
EXN4000 expansion unit 105 mixing EXN units 2
N3300 storage system 87 noise emission notes 88
N3600 storage system 87 physical characteristics 87
N3700 storage system 95 power cords 123
N5200 storage system 97 setup worksheet 127
N5300 storage system 97 single-controller
N5500 storage system 97 configuration limits 67
N5600 storage system 97 N3600 storage system
N7700 storage system 101 active/active
N7900 storage system 101 configuration limits 68
host operating system configuration limits for Fibre adapter support 3
Channel 65 clearance dimensions 87
host operating system configuration limits for iSCSI 65

Index 183
N3600 storage system (continued) N5300 filer
electrical requirements 88 features
environmental requirements 88 hardware 25
features mixing EXN units 2
hardware 10 N5300 gateway
hardware specifications 87 features
mixing EXN units 2 hardware 29
noise emission notes 88 N5300 storage system
physical characteristics 87 active/active
power cords 123 configuration limits 66
setup worksheet 127 adapter support 4
single-controller clearance dimensions 98
configuration limits 67 electrical requirements 99
N3700 storage system environmental requirements 98
active/active hardware specifications 97
configuration limits 69 noise emission notes 99
adapter support 3 physical characteristics 97
cabling to expansion units 14 power cords 123
clearance dimensions 96 raw storage capacity 27
cluster setup worksheet 130 single-controller
differences between early and current CPU module configuration limits 65
designs 14 system setup worksheet 131
electrical requirements 97 N5500 filer
environmental requirements 96 features
features hardware 32
hardware 13 mixing EXN units 2
hardware specifications 95 N5500 gateway
load board 14 features
noise emission notes 96 hardware 36
physical characteristics 95 N5500 storage system
power cords 123 active/active
raw storage capacity 16 configuration limits 66
setup worksheet 129 adapter support 4
single-controller clearance dimensions 98
configuration limits 69 electrical requirements 100
N3700 storage system library 171 environmental requirements 98
N5000 series systems library 171 hardware specifications 97
N5200 filer noise emission notes 99
features physical characteristics 97
hardware 17 power cords 123
mixing EXN units 2 raw storage capacity 34
raw storage capacity 19 single-controller
N5200 gateway configuration limits 65
features system setup worksheet 131
hardware 22 N5600 filer
N5200 storage system features
active/active hardware 39
configuration limits 66 mixing EXN units 2
adapter support 4 N5600 gateway
clearance dimensions 98 features
electrical requirements 99 hardware 44
environmental requirements 98 N5600 storage system
hardware specifications 97 active/active
noise emission notes 99 configuration limits 66
physical characteristics 97 adapter support 4
power cords 123 clearance dimensions 98
single-controller electrical requirements 100
configuration limits 65 environmental requirements 98
system setup worksheet 131 hardware specifications 97
noise emission notes 99
physical characteristics 97

184 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


N5600 storage system (continued) noise emission notes (continued)
power cords 123 N5300 storage system 99
raw storage capacity 42 N5500 storage system 99
single-controller N5600 storage system 99
configuration limits 65 N7700 storage system 102
system setup worksheet 131 N7900 storage system 102
N7000 series systems library 171 notices 175
N7700 filer attention xiii
features caution xiii
hardware 47 danger xi
mixing EXN units 2 electronic emission 177
N7700 gateway FCC, Class A 177
features safety xvi
hardware 52 safety and environmental xi
N7700 storage system types xi
active/active used in this document xxiv
configuration limits 66
adapter support 4
clearance dimensions 101 O
electrical requirements 102 Operation Manager Core (OMC) 83
environmental requirements 102 optical port terminators xiv
hardware specifications 101 optional adapter cards
noise emission notes 102 descriptions
physical characteristics 101 N3600 145
power cords 123 N5200 and N5500 149
raw storage capacity 49 N5300 and N5600 157
single-controller N7700 and N7900 163
configuration limits 65 overview, planning 1
system setup worksheet 132
N7900 filer
features P
hardware 55 PCI-Express (PCIe) adapters 165
mixing EXN units 2 PCI-X adapters
N7900 gateway optional 163
features physical characteristics
hardware 60 EXN1000 expansion unit 103
N7900 storage system EXN2000 expansion unit 105
active/active EXN4000 expansion unit 105
configuration limits 66 N3300 storage system 87
adapter support 4 N3600 storage system 87
clearance dimensions 101 N3700 storage system 95
electrical requirements 103 N5200 storage system 97
environmental requirements 102 N5300 storage system 97
hardware specifications 101 N5500 storage system 97
noise emission notes 102 N5600 storage system 97
physical characteristics 101 N7700 storage system 101
power cords 123 N7900 storage system 101
raw storage capacity 57 physical planning 1, 87
single-controller planning 1, 87
configuration limits 65 power cords 107, 123
system setup worksheet 132 feature codes 123
NearStore 77 power supplies and power requirements 107
NFS protocol 75 Protection Manager 83
noise emission notes
EXN1000 expansion unit 104
EXN2000 expansion unit 106
EXN4000 expansion unit 106
R
rack installation
N3300 storage system 88
safety xv
N3600 storage system 88
rack mount requirements 73, 107
N3700 storage system 96
rack relocation xviii
N5200 storage system 99
safety xviii

Index 185
rack safety xv third-party devices
rack specifications connection differences between early and current
for IBM products installed in a non-IBM rack 141 N3700 CPU module designs 15
general 138
IBM 2101 Model N00 133
IBM 7014 134 U
reader comment form processing xxvii United States electronic emission Class A notice 177
restrictions, usage xiv United States FCC Class A notice 177
usage restrictions xiv

S
safety W
environmental notices xi Web sites, related xxv
inspection procedure xv weight distribution, T00 rack 137
labels xi weight distribution, T42 rack 137
laser xiv worksheets
notices xi, xvi N3300 system setup 127
rack xv N3600 system setup 127
rack installation xv N3700 cluster system setup 130
rack relocation xviii N3700 system setup 129
safety labels xii N5000 series system setup 131
safety requirements for non-IBM rack 141 N7000 series system setup 132
security 111 Write Anywhere File Layout (WAFL) 3
Single Mailbox Recovery 83
site planning 1, 87
SMBR Content Analysis Wizard 83
SnapDrive 83
SnapLock Compliance 77
SnapLock Enterprise 77
SnapManager for Exchange 78, 83
SnapManager for Oracle 84
SnapManager for SAP 78
SnapManager for SharePoint 78
SnapManager for SQL 78, 83
SnapMirror 78
SnapMirror/SnapVault Bundle 78
SnapMover 78
SnapRestore 78
SnapShot 75
SnapValidator 79
SnapVault Primary 79
SnapVault Secondary 79
software features 79
software, N series storage system 75
specifications for the N series storage system 87
support for Ethernet adapters 3
supported features xxiii
SyncMirror 79

T
T00 and T42 rack caster location 135
T00 and T42 rack service clearances 135
T00 and T42 racks multiple attachments 136
T00 rack weight distribution and floor loading 137
T42 rack weight distribution and floor loading 137
tasks by document title 170
terminators
optical ports xiv
terminology xxvi
thermal considerations 109

186 IBM System Storage N series: Introduction and Planning Guide


Readers’ comments—we would like to hear from you
IBM System Storage N series
Introduction and Planning Guide

Publication No. GA32-0543-11

We appreciate your comments about this publication. Please comment on specific errors or omissions, accuracy,
organization, subject matter, or completeness of this book. The comments you send should pertain to only the
information in this manual or product and the way in which the information is presented.

For technical questions and information about products and prices, please contact your IBM branch office, your IBM
business partner, or your authorized remarketer.

When you send comments to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute your comments in any
way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you. IBM or any other organizations will only use the
personal information that you supply to contact you about the issues that you state on this form.

Comments:

Thank you for your support.


Send your comments to the address on the reverse side of this form.
If you would like a response from IBM, please fill in the following information:

Name Address

Company or Organization

Phone No. E-mail address


___________________________________________________________________________________________________
Readers’ Comments — We’d Like to Hear from You Cut or Fold
GA32-0543-11 򔻐򗗠򙳰 Along Line

_ _ _ _ _ _ _Fold
_ _ _and
_ _ _Tape
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _Please
_ _ _ _ _do
_ _not
_ _ staple
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _Fold
_ _ _and
_ _ Tape
______

NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED IN THE
UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL


FIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO. 40 ARMONK, NEW YORK

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

International Business Machines Corporation


Information Development
Dept. GZW
9000 South Rita Road
Tuscon, AZ
U.S.A. 85744-0001

_________________________________________________________________________________________
Fold and Tape Please do not staple Fold and Tape

Cut or Fold
GA32-0543-11 Along Line
򔻐򗗠򙳰

Printed in USA

GA32-0543-11